Home

1747-UM011E-EN-P, SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style User Manual

1. 6 10 Installing Your Hardware Components ATTENTION If you connect or disconnect the wiring to the terminal blocks or if you insert or remove the power supply while the power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous Failure to remove power could cause injury to personnel and or equipment POWER POWER Fuse EI Fuse U p Mma Jumper in Selection User lt 1 PWR OUT 24V de Not Used eee aD Not Used J PWR OUT COM O g a 120 240V ac 24V de X 100 120 Volts a V ac NEUT 5 V de NEUT A g Chassis Ground a Chassis Ground 200 240 Volts 1746 P1 and P2 1746 P3 1746 P5 oe POWER User PWR OUT 24V de POWER PWR OUT 24V de PWR OUT COM User lt PWR OUT COM P om aoe 1250 de 85 to 132V ac Ie 85 to 132V ac V de NEUT C a z Ven 170 to 250V ad gt 18 E Jumper Chassis
2. _ pou ai A SLC 5 02 CPU mm y RUN COMM S a CPU FAULT B FORCED 1 0 BATTERY LOW mm D Left Side View Mani Serial Number and Battery provides ica mene Catalog Number back up power for ene cet the CMOS RAM 1747 L524 Series C B qg l E DH 485 Channel 1 o t qm n Left Side View Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Identifying the Components of Your Processor 5 5 The table below provides a general explanation of each processor status LED for both the SLC 5 02 Series B and C Processor When It Is Indicates that LED RUN On steady The processor is in the Run mode Color red a Off The processor is in a mode other than Run CPU FAULT Flashing at The processor has not been configured Color red power up Flashing during The processor detects a major error either in the operation processor expansion chassis or memory On steady A fatal error is present no communication Off There are no errors FORCED 1 0 Flashing One or more input or output addresses have been Color red forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled On st
3. Octal Door Label ZG Q Q Q Z Q 2 12 LN aj se I Decimal Door Label Octal Kit and 1 0 Module Information 1 0 Module Octal Kit 1 0 Module Octal Kit Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1746 IA16 1746 RL40 1746 0V16 1746 RL53 1746 IB16 1746 RL41 1746 OW16 1746 RL54 1746 IG16 1746 RL42 1746 OBP16 1746 RL55 1746 IM16 1746 RL43 1746 OVP16 1746 RL56 1746 IN16 1746 RL44 1746 OAP12 1746 RL57 1746 IV16 1746 RL45 1746 IC16 1746 RL58 1746 ITB16 1746 RL46 1746 IH16 1746 RL59 1746 ITV16 1746 RL47 1746 1B32 1746 RL60 1746 0A16 1746 RL50 1746 IV32 1746 RL61 1746 0B16 1746 RL51 1746 0B32 and 1746 RL70 OB32E 1746 0616 1746 RL52 1746 0V32 1746 RL71 1746 OB16E 1746 RL72 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Wiring Your I O Modules 7 9 Using the Removable Terminal Block RTB Terminal Block Release Screw Dot indicates Terminal Number O __ _ or top of 1 0 wiring The Removable Terminal Block RTB is provided on all 12 point and 16 point discrete I O modules and analog modules They allow for faster and more convenient wiring of the I O modules Th
4. SLC 5 04 SLC 5 02 PC running D A D A PanelView Software lr glare EE 2 S S e 2 lt __1747 SN Series B j 1771 Remote 1 0 Network IH DH Network E 1747 DCM B EH Block 1 0 G H EEEE H PanelView Operator Terminal DeviceNet Network The SLC 5 03 OS302 or later SLC 5 04 OS401 or later and SLC 5 05 support remote I O passthru via both their communication ports A DeviceNet network connects plant floor devices directly to the control system e g SLC 500 controller reducing the number of I O interfaces and wiring associated with a typical hard wired solution The DeviceNet communication network is a completely open device network and has the support of industry s leading sensor actuator and control manufacturers The 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner In a typical configuration the 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner acts as an interface between DeviceNet devices and the SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors The scanner communicates with DeviceNet devices over the network to e read inputs from a device e write outputs to a device e download configuration data e monitor a device s operational status The scanner communicates with the SLC 500 processors to exchange I O data Information exchanged includ
5. Dia 1 0 11 Dia 175 gt 0 217 0 04 0 433 6 89 A r lt 7 8 3 2 1 I 140 3 1 140 171 5 51 158 j 5 51 6 73 171 a AG gg ooo g r me i i ee om om om oo moe oom oo y 14 1 o g 0 55 TE ae yo 0 217 1 77 lat 145 320 ml 5 71 12 60 340 13 39 lai 366 14 41 ari x Front View millimeters inches Left Side View 10 Slot Modular Chassis 1 0 p 0 04 5 5 Dia 140 0 433 0217 E 551 ein tava E H A 3 2 1 wij 1 140 1 5 51 18 140 171 ai Panamaan 0 0 Oi FT boc F ae e Fai Oo J 055 y 5 5 Dia ry g 1S mn 0 if 435 17 13 455 gt 17 91 a 481 18 94 Front View millimeters inches Left Side View Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 1 Dimensions for 1746 P1 power supply 2 Dimensions for 1746 P2 P3 P5 P6 and P7 power supplies 3 Dimensions for 1746 P4 power supply Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System 4 3 13 Slot Modular Chassis 0433 tan 2 d s i ea ain 0 433 as amp 5 51 ooo 6 fe eo 3 2 1 ea O Poo ob oo a 0 OD Ole es
6. Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Block 1 0 1747 ASB 1747 ASB I PanelView Operator Terminal Each 1747 SN Scanner supports 4 logical racks of 256 I O each per logical rack If large amounts of data need to be transferred to a device such as a PanelView Operator Interface the 1747 SN Series B Scanner supports block transfer of up to 64 words of data Up to 16 devices can be connected to a single remote I O network The SLC system supports multiple 1747 SN scanners if more devices are required to be controlled by a single SLC processor Remote 1 0 Passthru Remote I O passthru allows you to communicate between a personal computer on the same network as a SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 processor to devices on the Remote I O Network For example a personal computer running PanelBuilder32 Software and communicating on the DH network could upload and download applications from a PanelView Operator Terminal communicating on the Remote I O network This feature eliminates the need to physically connect the personal computer to the PanelView Operator Terminal when you need to change the application This capability is available on the 1747 SN Series B Scanner and the 1747 BSN Backup Scanner Control Networks D 3
7. Peripheral Device 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 1746 BAS GND 1 1 1 NC DSR 6 6 2 RXD lt RXD 2 3 3 XD TXD 3 2 4 DTR DTR 4 20 5 COM s CO 5 7 6 DSR lt DCD 1 8 7 RTS RTS 7 4 8 cis lt CTS 8 5 9 NC RI 9 22 DTE DCE 1 Connect to the shield of the cable 1746 BAS to a SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Processor Personal Computer 1770 KF3 or PLC 5 Hardware Handshaking Disabled 1 Peripheral Device 9 Pin 25 Pin g Pin 1746 BAS enp 1 a onc NC 1 8 eK I 2 RXD TXD 3 2 3 TXD RXD 2 3 y 4 DTR DTR 4 2 5 COM gt COM 5 7 ai 6 DSR DSR 6 6 T 2 C 7 RTS RTS 7 4 g gt 8 CTS CTS 8 5 lt 9 NC DTE DTE 1 You can also use cable 1747 CP3 2 Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port 3 Connect to the shield of the cable Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 RS 232 Communication Interface B 17 1770 KF3 to a Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 25 Pin 1770 KF3 GND 0 1 8 DCD lt DCD 1 8 3 RXD lt RXD 2 3 2 XD IXD 3 2 20 DTR DIR 4 20 7 COM g gt COM 5 7 6 DSR lt DSR 6 6 4 RTS RTS 7 4 5 CTS lt CTS 8 5 22
8. SLC 5 01 SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 1747 AIC DOA 0 PN A E MEG Sel eeheal 24V dc Power 3 0 Supply a DH 485 1747 C1 1761 NET AIC a 1747 CP3 or a 1761 CBL PM02 re DH 485 e RS 232 24V dc User Power Personal Computer Connection 1761 NET AIC th 1747 CP3 or i GEESE f 1761 CBL PMO2Z 24V dc User Power Connection Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 9 Important Planning Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any Considerations fener below are some of the factors that can affect system amount of electrical noise temperature and humidity in the network environment number of devices on the network connection and grounding quality in installation amount of communication traffic on the network type of process being controlled network configuration The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Hardware Considerations You need to decide the length of the communication cable where you will route it and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed When the communication cable is installed you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future The following sections will help you understand and plan
9. Operating System Download Protection Jumper do not move unless updating processor fa SLC 5 05 CPU RUN FORCE FLT ENET J L BATT RS232 N RUN REM PROG D Memory Module LT Keyswitch Ethernet Channel 1 a a Hardware a m Address 10Base T Channel 0 L fie RS 232 le A DH 485 oe XX XX XX Lo o A Write on area DF1 or y CNSA for IP Address ASCII Left Side View Serial Number and eae Operating System firmware Catalog Number The table below provides a general explanation of the processor status LEDs Processor When It Is Indicates that LED RUN On steady The processor is in the Run mode iGalbE gfe EN Flashing during The processor is transferring a program from operation RAM to the memory module Off The processor is in a mode other than Run FLT Flashing at power up The processor has not been configured yolon aed Flashing during The processor detects a major error either in the operation processor chassis or memory On steady A fatal error is present no communications Off There are no errors BATT On steady The battery voltage has fallen below a Color red threshold level or the battery is missing or not connected Off The battery is functional Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 5 14 Identifying the Components of Your Processor Publication 174
10. 9 Pin SLC 5 03 PC 9 Pin 1 DCD DCD 1 2 RXD lt TXD 3 3 XD RXD 2 4 DTR DSR 6 5 COM f gt COM 5 a 6 DSR lt DTR 4 7 RTS GTS 8 8 crs lt RTS 7 9 NC DCE DTE 1747 KE to a Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled Peripheral Device 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 1747 KE eno 1 1 NC DSR 6 6 2 RXD lt RXD 2 3 3 TXD gt XD 3 2 4 DTR gt DTR 4 20 5 COM _ COM 5 7 6 DSR lt DCR 1 8 7 RTS gt RTS 7 4 8 cis lt CTS 8 5 9 NC RI 9 22 DTE DCE 1 Connect to the shield of the cable 1747 KE to a SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Processor Personal Computer 1770 KF3 or PLC 5 Hardware Handshaking Disabled 1 Peripheral Device 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 1747 KE GND 1 1 NC DCD 1 3 x 2 RXD lt TXD 3 2 3 TXD gt RXD 2 3 aj 4 DTR DTR 4 2 5 COM COM 5 7 gt 6 DSR DSR 6 6 lt o 7 RTS RTS 7 4 e gt 8 CTS CTS 8 5 lt 9 NC DTE DTE 1 You can also use cable 1747 CP3 2 Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port 3 Connect to the shield of the cable Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 16 RS 232 Communication Interface 1746 BAS to a Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled
11. i 140 bd e 0585 y 5 5 Dia 5 51 gt A 0 217 540 21 26 lt 560 22 05 a 586 gt 23 07 ie Front View 0 04 millimeters a lt inches A 171 6 73 140 5 51 Y Y Le 145 5 71 Left Side View 1 Dimensions for 1746 P1 power supply 2 Dimensions for 1746 P2 P3 P5 P6 and P7 power supplies 3 Dimensions for 1746 P4 power supply Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 4 4 Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System Link Coupler AIC R274 146 0 11 i 5 75 al NET R55 A 0 22 172 6 75 159 6 24 a 5 41 LA y 4 0 55 L R A millimeters s 43 pl lg hen 1 50 55 Dia inches 0 17 0 216 nfs Seis Front View Right Side View g Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System 4 5 Data Table Access Module DTAM DTAM Plus and DTAM Micro lt C I ee i C HEHHE Ti Bana es ee 1 i Front View Right Side View Data Table Access Module Dimensions in millimeters inches A B H D DTAM 152 6 0 140 5 5 69 2 76 127 5 0 DTAM Plus 215 9 8 5 165 1 6 5 45 7 1 8 193 7 6 DTAM Micro 137 2 5 4 175 3 6 9 45 7 1 8 99 1 3 9 Publication 1747 U
12. 3 Install a wire tie to secure your wiring and keep it neat Uf you feed the tie into one hole it will be routed back out through the other 4 Cover any unused slots with card slot fillers Catalog Number 1746 N2 to keep the chassis free from debris and dust 5 To remove the module press the retaining clips at the top and bottom of the module and slide the module out Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Installing Your Hardware Components 6 7 Installing Your Memory Always turn off power to the controller before removing the processor Module Side View of SLC Processor 1747 L511 L514 and L524 Series Memory O Module Socket Jumper J1 Note Jumper J1 not on 1747 L511 or inserting or removing the memory module This guards against possible damage to the module and also undesired processor faults Memory modules are mounted in carriers or have connectors that are keyed to guard against improper installation To avoid potential damage to the memory modules ATTENTION handle them by the ends of the carrier or edges of the plastic housing Skin oil and dirt can corrode metallic surfaces inhibiting electrical contact Also do not expose memory modules to surfaces or areas that may typically hold an electrostatic charge Electrostatic charges can alter or destroy memory 1 If the processor module is installed in the chassi
13. ou would calculate heat dissipation as shown in the worksheet on Calculation j P page G 8 DTAM Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Peripheral Device D A D JE 88 BIE EEE _ E 23222A 2222 22229 OWOC Slot 1 2 3 Slot 4 5 User Power to Peripheral The following table details the total watts dissipated by the modules and peripheral devices in the above SLC 500 controller The numbers were taken from the tables on page G 3 Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Slot Number Catalog Min Watts Max Watts Slot Number Catalog Min Watts Max Watts Number Number 0 1747 L511 1 75 1 75 4 1746 IA16 0 425 4 800 1 1746 BAS 3 750 3 80 5 1746 1A16 0 425 4 800 2 1746 IA8 0 250 2 40 6 1746 OW16 5 170 5 5002 3 1746 0V8 0 675 6 90 7 1746 OW16 5 170 5 700 Peripheral 1747 DTAM 2 500 2 50 NA NA NA NA Device User Power to NA NA NA NA NA 2 400 NA Peripheral 1 The user power on the 1746 P1 power supply for Chassis 2 is being used to power a peripheral 100 mA at 24V dc 2 This output card uses 5 5 Watts because only 10 points are on at any one time Using the calculated watts formula number of points energized x watts per point minimum watts heat dissipation of module the calculated watts for the 1746 OW16 module is 5 5W 10 points x 33 5 17 5 5W Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 G 8 Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System Example Worksheet Procedure for calculating the total heat dissipatio
14. If the download is not successful the FLT LED turns on and a combination of LEDs flash on and off indicating an error condition The following table provides you with information regarding error messages possible cause s for the error and recommended action to resolve the error Troubleshooting 10 19 LED Status The Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists i 2 a fr uu wo N j2 2 E IR 2 iz z la 2 On Off Off On Off On Off NVRAM error Major hardware Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself If the failure due to noise error clears you should be able to download the improper grounding or operating system If the error persists contact your poor power source Rockwell Automation representative On Off On On On Off On Hardware Major hardware Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself If the Watchdog failure due to noise error clears you should be able to download the Timeout improper grounding or operating system If the error persists contact your poor power source Rockwell Automation representative On Off On On On Off Off Fatal Hardware Major hardware Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself If the Error failure due to noise error clears you should be able to download the improper grounding or operating system If the error persists contact your poor power
15. Fuse sl U H pag 3 Pin Jumper H COCOA ATTENTION The exposed pins on the 3 pin jumper is electrically live Contact with the pin may cause injury to personnel Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 9 8 Maintaining Your Control System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting In this chapter you will learn about e contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance e tips for troubleshooting your control system e troubleshooting the SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 processors e troubleshooting the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors e troubleshooting your input modules e troubleshooting your output modules Contacting Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for Automation for Assistance assistance it is helpful to obtain the following prior to calling e processor type series letter operating system OS number obtained from the status file firmware FRN number see label on side of processor module e processor LED status e processor error codes found in S 6 of status file e hardware types in system O modules chassis e revision of programming software e tech connect serial number e RSLogix software serial number Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 2 Troubleshooting Tips for Troubleshooting Your Contr
16. The memory module for the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors is called Flash EPROM Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash EPROMs combine the programming versatility of EEPROMs with the security precautions of UVPROMs This means that you have the option of leaving your EPROM programs write protected or unprotected Write protect the EPROM using either your software or a PROM programmer The memory modules consist of a Flash EPROM mounted on a circuit board with a connector and plastic housing Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 23 Adapter sockets 1747 M15 are required when inserting memory modules into commercially available PROM programmer The 1747 M15 Series B is required for use with the 1747 M13 memory module ATTENTION Make sure the adapter is inserted properly in the programming equipment or damage could result See the table below for details on the Flash EPROM and adapter socket Use with this processor type Catalog Description SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 Mumbar 1747 1531 1747 L532 1747 L541 1747 L542 1747 L551 1747 L552 1747 L543 1747 L553 1747 M1 1 Supports up to 32K of user memory bac up X X Series A 0S300 or 0S301 0S400 1747 M11 Supports up to 32K of user memory bac up X l X X Series B 0S302 or higher 0S401 or higher 1747 M12 Supports up to 64K of user memory bac up X X l X 0S302 or higher 0S401 or high
17. P 3 Rockwell Automation Support n os aoaaa saaa P 3 Your Questions or Comments on this Manual P 4 Chapter 1 Required Tools and Equipment 04 1 2 PLOCECULES pirri roron ape e i K R a e Rt 1 2 Chapter 2 European Union Directive Compliance 2 2 EMG Dire tives sithne i neh anoa alge a pia a ae Ra onih 2 2 Low Voltage Directive 4 oa naaa 2 2 Overview of Your Modular Control System 2 3 Principles of Machine Control s 12s 34 he04 ese cee es 2 4 Selecting Modular Processors 9 66s Bet eh e EPR EY 2 5 Processor Features ot 4a ot dada Pk ted at 2 5 Processor Communication Options 2 6 SLC 500 System Test General Specifications 2 10 Processor General Specifications 2 11 Memory Backup for the 1747 L511 SLC 5 01 Processor 2 12 Selecting Discrete I O Modules vious a kvarn a Gea hin aeana ee sees 2 12 Selecting Specialty I O Modules 9 4 5 0 34 4 tak wactw eb 2 12 Selecting Power Supplies o an aed eee BG RR 2 13 Power Supply Specifications 1746 P1 P2 P3 and 2 A r eee OF rA aa r E a e A ee 2 14 Power Supply Specifications 1746 P5 P6 and P7 2 15 Example for Selecting Power Supplies 2 16 Example Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply 2 17 Selecting ENClosSuUtES eng fon CRY kt Ree wk EPR eS 2 19 Selecting Operator Interfaces werk ine HG a es 2 19 Programming with a Personal Computer
18. 1 2 3 4 J4 jumper set to RACK J4 jumper set to EXT Power supply loading for Series D and later modules the current loading for the AIC to the BAS or KE module s power supply loading value at 24V dc 5 6 7 USB power consumption is less than 100 mA the controller when an external source is used The 24V dc loading values of the PIC and DTAM are included in the 24V dc loading value of the processor When using the BAS or KE modules to supply power to an AIC draws its power through the module Add 0 085A Current for the 1761 NET AIC must be supplied from an external 24V dc source No current is consumed from Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 F 4 Power Supply Worksheet Blank Worksheet Procedure 1 For each slot of the chassis that contains a module list the slot number the catalog number of the module and its 5V and 24V maximum currents Also include the power consumption of any peripheral devices that may be connected to the processor other than a DIAM or PIC the power consumption of these devices is accounted for in the power consumption of the processor Chassis Number Maximum Currents Chassis Number Slot Number estalo Number arv de ar20 de Stot Number oo M w p p o e S s e a S S a i iY e __ a 2 Add the loading currents of all the system 2 Add the loading currents of all the system devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the devices at 5 and 24V dc to de
19. After thoroughly checking out the controller system and program proceed with a dry run of the application with all of the output devices enabled This dry run will vary with the application A machine tool dry run would test the program with all outputs enabled but without tooling an actual part After you check out the entire system and your dry run has been completed satisfactorily we recommend that you load your program into an EEPROM memory module for back up program storage Refer to your programming software s online help for directions on loading the EEPROM from RAM This step completes start up procedures Your SLC programmable controller is now ready for operation Handling and Storing Battery Catalog Number 1747 BA Chapter 9 Maintaining Your Control System This chapter covers the following maintenance issues e handling and storing battery Catalog Number 1747 BA e installing and replacing the battery of the SLC 5 01 or SLC 5 02 processor e replacing your SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 battery e replacing retainer clips on an I O module e replacing a fuse on the power supply See page 3 18 for important information on testing the Master Control Relay Circuit and Preventive Maintenance Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards Handling e Use only for the intended operation e Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedu
20. N Remove line power to power supply remove several output modules from the chassis wait five minutes reapply power If condition reoccurs re calculate module configuration power required and verify proper power supply selection See page 2 13 This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is slightly overloaded when output loading and temperature varies Defective power supply N Se Recheck other probable causes Monitor the line power to chassis power supply for possible transient or shorting Replace the power supply Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 If the LEDs Indicate e FLT LED On e All Other LEDs Off e Status of any Communication LED does not matter The Following Error Exists Inadequate system power Table 10 3 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Errors Probable Cause Improper line power voltage selection Troubleshooting 10 11 Recommended Action Verify proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 e Power LED On e All Other LEDs Off e Status of any Communication LED does not matter Processor not in run mode Either improper mode selected or user program logic error N Se Verify selected processor mode If in program or test mode try to enter run mode a If the keyswitch is in the REM position and there is no key use the programmer b If the keyswitch is
21. 2 19 AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC 2 19 DH 485 Interface Converters 00 00 0050 2 19 Monitoring with a Data Table Access Module 2 20 Monitoring with a PanelView Operator Terminal 2 20 Selecting a Memory Module for the SLC 5 01 and SL 02 PIOCESSOIS wd ih gh ed RR MOR aT Res 2 21 Selecting a Memory Module for SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 PECCESSOIS 2 gt ince ton Ena PED etd shee BSG 2 22 EEPROM Burning Options 000 0000 eee eee 2 24 Selecting Isolation Transformers 64 seks tea OE es 2 25 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 ii Table of Contents System Installation Recommendations Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Special Considerations eh Tea a oe Hoge tS eee ess 2 26 Class I Division 2 Applications 2 26 Selecting Contact Protection 3 444 440 Law aca la dak 2 29 Chapter 3 SYSE OVERVIEW un heh ous Pale BAe a Ge A Ge ed pee Beas 3 2 Environment and Enclosure 0 0005 3 2 Hazardous Location Considerations 3 3 Typical Mista lavOnsa sa ate wed ce ees Cee See Red 3 4 Spacing Your Controller saci soc yds 8 2 40g Gane hae 8 Gent 3 4 Preventing Excessive Heat pai Facet Sie pe ee a 3 6 Grounding Guidelines a oa ie ey award wen as 3 7 Connect Equipment Grounding Conductor to Ground Bus er amp a Gee ais 4re ROME oe Bo Ge om he Roe 3 7
22. Check communication device for example the 1747 PIC Replace if necessary Low or No Power to Communication Device N Verify proper power supply selection and backplane loading 1747 PIC and 1747 AlC draw power off the backplane Verify proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 Power LED On Comm LED On CPU Fault LED Off or Flashing Status of Run Forced 0 and Battery Low LEDs does not matter The SLC 5 02 processor is receiving data but is not communicating with the programmer DH 485 communication parameters are set up improperly N ow Check communication parameters of programmer Programmer and processor baud rate must match Programmer and processor node addresses must be different Try different combinations of a baud rate default is 19 2K b node address default is 1 Try to increase the maximum node address default is 31 Power LED On CPU Fault LED On Status of all other LEDs does not matter A fatal error has occurred Excessive noise or a faulty SLC 5 02 processor pes N Se gt Cycle power to obtain flashing CPU Fault LED and default program Examine the error code following the power cycle Take appropriate action Reload the program Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February
23. PID e e Advanced Math and Trig e Indirect Addressing e e Floating Point Math e ASCII e e Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 6 Selecting Your Hardware Components Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Processor Communication Options The SLC 500 processors support several communication options The following sections describe the available physical connections and protocol options used by the SLC 500 processors Physical Connection Options Ethernet 10Base T channel offers e 10 Mbps communication rate e ISO IEC 8802 3STD 802 3 RJ45 connector for 10Base T media e TCP IP communication protocol e built in isolation Data Highway Plus DH channel offers e communication rates of 57 6K 115 2K and 230 4K baud e maximum network length of 3 048m 10 000 ft at 57 6K baud e Belden 9463 blue hose cable connection between nodes daisy chain connection e built in isolation DH 485 channel offers e configurable isolation via the 1747 AIC or 1761 NET AIC e maximum network length of 1219m 4 000 ft e RS 485 electrical specifications e Belden 9842 or Belden 3106A cable connection between nodes daisy chain connection RS 232 channel offers e communication rates up to 19 2K baud 38 4K baud SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 e Maximum distance between devices is 15 24 m 50 ft e RS 232C EIA 232 electrical specifications e modem support e built in isol
24. RTS CTS NC A 1 Connect to the shield of the cable PLC 5 Channel 0 to a SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Processor Personal Computer 1770 KF3 PLC 5 1747 KE or 1746 BAS Hardware Handshaking Disabled 2 2 1 You can also use cable 1747 CP3 DTE 25 Pin PLC 5 CHO 8 DCD 3 RXD 2 XD 20 DTR COM DSR RTS CTS 22 NC DTE Peripheral D evice Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin GND 1 DCD 1 8 RXD 2 3 TXD 3 2 DTR 4 20 COM 5 7 DSR 6 6 RTS 7 4 CTS 8 5 RI 9 22 DCE 9 Pin 25 Pin GND 3 DCD TXD RXD DTR COM DSR RTS CTS DTE 2 Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port 3 Connect to the shield of the cable Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 2 RS 232 Communication Interface B 19 Applications for the RS 232 The figures below illustrate different applications for the RS 232 Communication Interface communication interface DF1 Full Duplex Peer to Peer Modem fe SLC 5 03 Modular Controller SLC 5 03 Modular Controller Half Duplex wit
25. Appendix F Power Supply Worksheet Power Supply Loading Use the table below to calculate the power supply loading for each chassis in your SLC modular application Hardware Component Catalog Numbers Maximum Current A at 5V dc at 24V dc Processors 1747 L511 0 350 0 105 1747 L514 0 350 0 105 1747 L524 0 350 0 105 1747 L531 0 500 0 175 1747 L532 0 500 0 175 1747 L541 1 000 0 1747 L542 1 000 0 1747 L543 1 000 0 1747 L551 1 000 0 1747 L552 1 000 0 1747 L553 1 000 0 Digital Input Modules 1746 I1A4 0 035 1746 IA8 0 050 1746 1A16 0 085 1746 IB8 0 050 1746 1B16 0 085 1746 1B32 0 050 1746 1C16 0 085 1746 1G16 0 140 1746 1H16 0 085 1746 IM4 0 035 1746 IM8 0 050 1746 IM16 0 085 1746 IN16 0 085 1746 ITB16 0 085 1746 ITV16 0 085 1746 IV8 0 050 1746 IV16 0 085 1746 1V32 0 050 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 F 2 Power Supply Worksheet Hardware Component Catalog Numbers Maximum Current A at 5V de at 24V dc Digital Output Modules 1746 0A8 0 185 1746 0A16 0 370 1746 0AP12 0 370 1746 0B6EI 0 046 1746 0B8 0 135 1746 0B16 0 280 1746 0B16E 0 135 1746 0B32 0 190 1746 0B32E 0 190 1746 OBP8 0 135 1746 OBP16 0 250 1746 0G16 0 180 1746 0V8 0 135 1746 0V16 0 270 1746 0V32 0 190 1746 OV
26. Full Duplex Point to Point 0 U G a Modem SLC 5 03 y SLC 5 03 1747 L532 1747 L532 peanon a E 3 a L a 1747 CP3 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol DF1 half duplex protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple slave network In contrast to the DF1 full duplex protocol communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use channel 0 as a programming port or as a peer to peer port using the MSG instruction In half duplex mode the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors can be either master or slave devices As a master device the processor polls each slave on the network on a regular and sequential basis The master also supports routing of data packets from one slave to another or slave to slave communication As a slave device the processor can send data packets when polled by the master device which initiates all communication with slave devices If the master device has no data to send it can still receive data from the slave device To do this the master sends out a poll packet addressed to the slave If the slave has data to send it does so in response to the poll packet Otherwise the slave sends a simple two byte response so that the master knows that it is active Several Allen Br
27. If so and the answer to 2 is yes as well then you can take full advantage of the peer to peer message initiation capability in every node i e the ladder logic in any node can trigger a MSG instruction to any other node at any time If not then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver but only if you limit MSG instruction initiation to a single master node whose transmission can be received by every other node 4 Can I take advantage of the SLC 5 04 and 5 05 channel to channel passthru to remotely program the other SLC nodes using RSLinx and RSLogix 500 running on a PC connected to a local SLC processor via DH or Ethernet Yes with certain limitations imposed based on the radio modem network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 10 RS 232 Communication Interface ASCII Communication DF1 Communication Protocol Modems Overview Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 ASCII protocol allows you to connect the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors to serial printers PCs and other third party devices ASCII protocol allows your ladder program to manage ASCII data Modular Controller with SLC 5 03 Processor A Eataa G J EEE RS 232 Channel 0 1747 CP3 You can connect the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors to several different
28. a o rem omm po o reo oro or a 2 vem oma fo 2 reno 00558 oa w o veme om fo o reno oa a sa Coo A 0 o reo oa a w f o o o e e re oa a 5 a a O OZ a w _ a ee e Pede ae 00654 orea ae o S oa PeipheralDevie __ Perineal Device 2 Add the loading currents of all the system 0 905A 0 190A 2 Add the loading currents of all the 0 830A 1 220A devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the system devices at 5 and 24V de to Total Current determine the Total Current 3 For 1746 P4 power supplies calculate the total power consumption of all system devices If you are not using a 1746 P4 go to step 4 Total Current at 5V de 0 905A 4 525W Total Current at 5V de 0 830A 4 15W Total Current 0 190A 24V 4 56W Total Current 1 220A 24V 29 28W at 24V de at 24V de a l User Current 0 500A 2 12 00W User Current 0 500A 12 00W at 24V de at 24V de Add the Watts values to determine Total Power 21 085W Add the Watts values to determine Total Power 45 43W cannot exceed 70 Watts cannot exceed 70 Watts 4 Choose the power supply from the list of catalog numbers shown below Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current capacity of the power supplies Be sure that the Total Current consumption for the chassis is less than the Internal Current Capacity for the power supply for both 5V and 24V loads Catalog Number Internal Current Catalog Number Internal Current Capacity Capacity
29. 8 position terminal block used with analog outputs Catalog Numbers 1746 NO4I 1746 RT27 Replacement Terminal Block Used with analog input modules Catalog Numbers 1746 NI4 NIO4I NIO4V FIO4I 1746 RT28 FIO4V Replacement Terminal Block Used with RIO Communication Modules Catalog Numbers 1747 SN DSN DCM 1746 RT29 Replacement Terminal Block 6 position DH 485 plug connector 1746 RT30 used with DH 485 Link Coupler Catalog Number 1747 AIC and Advanced Interface Converter Catalog Number 1761 NET AIC Replacement Terminal Block Used with SLC 500 Remote 1 0 Adapter Module Catalog Number 1747 ASB 1746 RT31 Replacement Terminal Block Used with Thermocouple mV Module Catalog Number 1746 NT4 1746 RT32 Replacement Terminal Block 3 position DH connector used with SLC 5 04 Processors Catalog Numbers 1746 RT33 1747 L541 1747 542 L542P 1747 1543 Replacement Terminal Block Green Used with Thermocouple mV Input Module Catalog Number 1746 NT8 1746 RT34 Replacement Terminal Block Green Used with RTD resistance Input Module Catalog Number 1746 NR8 1746 RT35 Other Replacement Hardware Description Catalog Number Replacement Fuses Five fuses per package Orders must be for multiples of five Catalog Number for 1746 P1 power supply 1746 F1 Catalog Number for 1746 P2 power supply 1746 F2 Catalog Number for 1746 P3 power supply 1746 F3 Fixed I O AC units MDL 1 25 Ampere 1746 F4 Fixed 1 0 DC units MDL 1 6
30. User program logic error 1 Monitor logic in Run mode and verify desired I O status 2 Check for minor CPU faults Defective 0 devices or I 0 wiring Test inputs and outputs according to 1 0 troubleshooting procedures starting on page 10 22 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 12 Troubleshooting Table 10 3 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Errors If the LEDs Indicate e Power LED On e CPU Fault LED On e All Other LEDs Off e Status of any Communication LED does not matter The Following Error Exists CPU Fault Probable Cause CPU memory error Recommended Action Cycle power Faulty memory module 1 Remove power and then remove the memory module from the processor 2 Re install the processor and re apply power to the power supply If steady CPU Fault LED changes to flashing replace the existing memory module with a replacement module Refer to 6 for removing and installing memory modules Faulty processor or power supply 1 Place the processor in another chassis not in the existing system and cycle power If steady CPU Fault LED reappears replace the processor 2 If CPU Fault LED clears monitor the line power going to the power supply in existing system Replace existing system power supply if line power checks OK Processor firmware installed incorrectly If upgrading the processor to a different firmware level verify that the fir
31. 1746 P1 0 46A 1746 P1 46A 1746 P2 0 96A 1746 P2 0 96A 746 P3 3 6A 0 87A 1746 P3 BIA 1746 P4 see step 3 10 0A 2 88A 1746 P4 see step 3 10 0A 2 88A 746 P5 0 96A 1746 P5 96A 1746 P6 0 96A 1746 P6 0 96A 12V de input 0 46A 1746 P7 12V de input AGA 24V de input 0 87A 24V de input 0 87A Required Power Supply 1746 P1 Required Power Supply 1746 P4 1 See 1746 P7 current capacity chart on page 2 16 Oo Oo Oo Oo Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Selecting Enclosures Selecting Operator Interfaces Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 19 The enclosure protects the equipment from atmospheric contamination Standards established by the National Electrical Manufacturer s Association NEMA define enclosure types based on the degree of protection an enclosure will provide Use a fan to circulate the air of sealed enclosures that use convection cooling to dissipate heat Select a NEMA rated enclosure that suits your application and environment The enclosure should be equipped with a disconnect device To calculate the heat dissipation of your controller see Appendix G Use an operator interface to program and or monitor your SLC 500 controller You can choose from several Allen Bradley operator interface devices Programming with a Personal Computer Contact Rockwell Software or your local Allen Bradley distributor for specifications and availability of software packages available to program the SLC 500 Modular C
32. B 14 RS 232 Communication Interface SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Processor Connected to a Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled SLC Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 5 03 GND 1 1 DCD lt DCD 1 8 2 RXD lt RXD 2 3 3 XD gt TXD 3 2 4 DTR DIR 4 20 5 COM _7 COM 5 7 6 DSR lt DSR 6 6 7 RTS gt RTS 7 4 8 CTS CTS 8 5 9 no j lt R 9 22 DTE DCE 1 Connect to the shield of the cable SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Processor to another SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Personal Computer 1770 KF3 or PLC 5 Hardware Handshaking Disabled Peripheral SLC Device 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 5 03 enp 1 r a 4 DCD DCD 1 8 ae 12 2 D XD 3 2 3 RXD RXD 2 3 4 DTR DTR 4 2 __ 5 COM gt COM 5 7 L gt 6 DSR DSR 6 E el a 7 RTS RTS 7 4 2 8 CTS CTS 8 5 lt 3 m DCE DTE 1 You can also use cable 1747 CP3 2 Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port 3 Connect to the shield of the cable Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 RS 232 Communication Interface B 15 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Processor Connected to a Personal Computer with a 1747 CP3 Cable
33. Bulletin 700 Type N P or PK Relay 150V max AC or DC 700 N242 Miscellaneous electromagnetic 150V max AC or DC 700 N242 devices limited to 35 sealed VA 1 Varistor Not recommended for use on relay outputs 2 RC Type Do not use with Triac outputs Selecting Contact Protection Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids may require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the controller output contacts Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the lifetime of relay contacts The figure below shows the use of surge suppression devices Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 30 Selecting Your Hardware Components Surge Suppression for Inductive AC Load Devices T Output Device Output Device Output Device Surge gt lt Ev Suppressor Varistor RC Network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Surge Suppression for Inductive DC Load Devices Output Device Diode A surge suppressor can also be used Contact protection methods for inductive AC and DC output devices These surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device This reduces arcing of the output contacts High transient can cause arcing that occurs when switching off an inductive device Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive AC load devices include a varistor an RC network or an Allen Bradley surge
34. Change the jumper on the processor to the program Write Protected to download the position operating system onto write protected memory Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 20 Troubleshooting Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Returning the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processors to Initial Factory Conditions We only recommend this procedure if the communication channels have been shut down due to the configuration parameters or if you absolutely cannot establish communications with the processor WARNING If you return the processor to the initial factory conditions the user program is lost and communication configurations are returned to their default settings To return the processor to initial factory conditions 1 Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply 2 Remove the processor from the chassis 3 Disconnect the battery by removing the battery connector from its socket 4 Locate the VBB and GND connections on the right side of the motherboard 5 Place a small bladed screwdriver across the VBB and GND connections and hold for 60 seconds This returns the processor to the initial factory conditions Troubleshooting 10 21 SLC 5 03 1747 L531 and 1747 L532 Keyswitch Mother Board Right Side View SLC 5 04 1747 L541 1747 L542 and 1747 L543 SLC 5 05 1747 L551 1747 L552 and 1747 L553 2608 2920 29
35. Integer 3 Floating Point 256 ASCI 256 ASCI 256 ASCI 256 ASCI od I amp II SUS S cat 2 5 as z f La io 3 Module Home Page Module Information TCP IP Configuration Diagnostic Information Memory Map D T Monitor User Provided Pages Each file contains a hyperlink that takes you to the specific Data Table Monitor page for that file When you click on a particular file the Data Table Monitor page appears displaying the contents of the data table file you selected E 1747 L552 Data Table Monitor Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation Pi EJ Il Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor Data Table Monitor h feed 1111110000000000 1111110000000000 5432109876543210 5432109876543210 B30 10100101 01011010 Data Table Address B3 0 Display format Binary Refresh data every fis seconds Default Disable Change Parameters Module Home Page Module Information TCP IP Configuration Diagnostic Information Memory Map D T Monitor User Provided Pages I The available and default display formats depend on the data type of the file Press the Prev or Next buttons to display the previous or next page of the data table file if any Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 16 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Publ
36. and relays To avoid damage to your SLC 500 power supply in these applications use an isolation transformer to isolate Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 6 12 Installing Your Hardware Components Installing Your Chassis Interconnect Cable Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 For the 1746 P1 P2 P4 P5 and P6 power supplies use PWR OUT 24V dc and PWR OUT COM terminals to power 24V dc sensors and loads The terminals on the 1746 P1 1746 P2 1746 P5 and 1746 P6 provide an isolated nonfused 200 mA 24V dc power supply The terminals on the 1746 P4 provide an isolated nonfused 1A 24V dec power supply The 1746 P3 and P7 power supplies do not provide for an external power source Three cables are available to link modular hardware chassis Catalog Number 1746 C7 cable is 152 4 mm 6 in in length and is used when connecting chassis side by side Catalog Number 1746 C9 is 914 4 mm 36 in in length and 1746 C16 is 1 27M 50 in in length and are used to link one chassis below the other 1746 C9 and 1746 C16 cables have a rigid IMPORTANT IMPORTANT unbendable shrink wrap applied at the end of each connector which provides strain relief When using these cables provide at least 101 6 mm 4 in of clearance at the side of the chassis to allow for proper bend radius of the cable eem Do not use any cables other than those provided Longer cables could affect the integrity of data communications b
37. information that describes the DH 485 network functions network architecture and performance characteristics It also covers e DH 485 network description e DH 485 network protocol e DH 485 token rotation e DH 485 network initialization e devices that use the DH 485 network e 1747 AIC isolated link coupler for DH 485 e 1747 UIC USB to DH 485 interface converter e example system configuration includes 1761 NET AIC advanced interface converter e important planning considerations e installing the DH 485 network The DH 485 network passes information between devices on the plant floor The network monitors process parameters device parameters device status process status and application programs to support data acquisition data monitoring program upload download and supervisory control The DH 485 network offers e interconnection of 32 devices e multi master capability e token passing access control e the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network e maximum network length of 1219 m 4000 f 1 The network can be extended to 2 438 meters 8 000 feet by connecting two AIC Advanced Interface Converters 1761 NET AIC Refer to the A C Advanced Interface Converter User Manual publication number 1761 6 4 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 2 Setting Up the DH 485 Network DH 485 Network Protocol DH 485 Token Rotation DH 485 Network Initialization Publication 1747 UM01
38. 03 and lower Monitoring with a Data Table Access Module The Data Table Access Module DTAM is a plant floor device that lets you access data file information change operating modes monitor and clear processor faults and transfer the user program between RAM and an EEPROM memory module with any SLC 5 01 5 02 or 5 03 family processor You cannot use it to create new programs Important features of DTAM include e shorthand addressing which provides easier access to data files e display prompts in six user selectable languages English French German Italian Spanish and Japanese e UL listed to US and Canadian Safety Standards e NEMA type 12 and 13 enclosures e point to point interface to an SLC family processor or as a network device on a DH 485 network Monitoring with a PanelView Operator Terminal The PanelView Operator Terminals provide operator interface capabilities in space saving flat panel designs Offering optimum viewing angles these electronic operator interfaces feature pixel graphics and high performance functionality in both color and monochrome displays The PanelView Operator Terminals allow you to enter input using function keys or a touch screen depending upon the model Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 21 All PanelView Operator Terminals are available with DF1 or DH 485 RS 232 communications capability allowing them to communicate directly with channel 0 on an SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05
39. 11 follow the recommended output troubleshooting steps in the next section Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 8 8 Starting Up Your Control System Output Troubleshooting Steps 1 2 Make sure the processor is in the Run mode Verify proper addressing of the output test rung from the previous page Using a programming device locate the output data file and bit data file See if the status of the associated bits between these files match If the status of the bits match in step 3 and if the status of the output LED match the status of the bits but the status of the output device is different continue to step 5 If the output status LED does not match associated bit status check status file S 11 and S 12 I O slot enables Bits 11 0 through S 11 15 and S 12 0 through S 12 14 should all be 1 enabling all I O slots for the modular system If the output slot enable was verified then try exchanging the output module under test with identical hardware and retest If the new hardware works properly replace the original Verify proper output voltage at the output terminal and then at the output device De energize the output circuit and check all output circuit terminations and wire routes If proper output voltage does not exist at the output device and the power source is adequate to drive the output device test the output device and replace it if necessary For more information on
40. 14 2 12 12 2 10 2 0 gt 8 ch a S 4 Sp N N 5 2 5 2 0 0 0 5 10 15 20 2 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Power Supply Loading Watts Power Supply Loading Watts 1746 P3 Power Supply Change in Power 1746 P4 Power Supply Change in Power Dissipation due to Output Loading Dissipation due to Output Loading z 25 FA J g i 204 203 S S w 154 gs 154 5 10 S 104 amp 54 Toed A 3 a D g z 0 z i cs 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 ram 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Power Supply Loading Watts 1746 P6 Power Supply Change in Power Dissipation due to Output Loading 25 4 10 20 30 40 50 60 Power Supply Loading Watts Power Supply Dissipation Watts 0 1020 30 40 50 60 Power Supply Loading Watts nput nput 1746 P7 Power Supply Change in Power MS Dissipation due to Output Loading 20 18 AG AV i 14 B12 12V i 10 gt 4 cL E 0 a 0 20 40 60 80 100 Power Supply Loading Watts Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System G 7 Example Heat Dissipation If your controller consisted of the following hardware components
41. 1746 1012 0 090 070 3 4 5 6 Analog Output 1746 NO4I 0 22 0 0 780 Sot 0123456 Modules 4 x 0 055 4 x 0 195 Peripheral device Isolated Link Coupler 1747 AIC 0 000 0 085 Peripheral device Interface Converter 1746 PIC Not Applicable Not Applicable Total Current 0 830 1 220 1 Power Supply 1746 P4 is sufficient for Chassis 2 The Internal Current Capacity for this power supply is 10 Amps at 5V dc 2 88 Amps at 24V dc not to exceed 70 Watts Example Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply If you have a multiple chassis system make copies of the Power Supply Worksheet found on page F 4 For a detailed list of device load currents refer to the SLC 500 Modular Chassis and Power Supplies Technical Data Publication Number 1746 TD003 TIP Consider future system expansion when selecting a power supply Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 18 Selecting Your Hardware Components Procedure 1 For each slot of the chassis that contains a module list the slot number the catalog number of the module and its 5V and 24V maximum currents Also include the power consumption of any peripheral devices that may be connected to the processor other than a DIAM or PIC the power consumption of these devices is accounted for in the power consumption of the processor Chassis Number 1 Maximum Currents Chassis Number 2 Maximum Currents ce aia a ea at Number at Coren oo oa St o ora ooa 07068
42. A 7 grounding and terminating A 16 initialization A 2 installation A 13 isolated link coupler A 4 planning considerations A 9 protocol A 2 DH 485 RS 232 Interface Module user s manual B 3 DHCP configuring SLC 5 05 E 9 definition Glossary 2 DIN rail Glossary 4 discrete I O modules 2 12 download Glossary 4 DSR Data Set Ready B 1 DTAM Micro mounting dimensions 4 5 DTAM Plus monitoring with 2 20 mounting dimensions 4 5 DTE Data Terminal Equipment B 10 DTE controlled answer Glossary 4 DTE definition Glossary 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready B 10 DTR dialing Glossary 5 an E EEPROM 1K User Words 2 22 AK User Words 2 22 EEPROM burning options 2 24 embedded responses B 4 EMC Directive 6 1 emergency controller shutdown 3 12 Emergency Stop Switches 3 13 EMI Glossary 5 enclosures environment 3 2 selecting 2 18 encoder definition Glossary 5 end device B 4 Environmental Protection Agency EPA 9 3 equipment needed for installation 1 2 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 4 Index errors SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 processors 10 4 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 processors 10 10 while downloading an operating system 10 18 Ethernet advanced functions E 10 messaging E 2 processor performance E 2 using the SLC 5 05 processors E 1 European Union Directive Compliance 2 2 European Union Directives 6 1 executing mode Glossary 5 F false Glossary 5 features SLC 5 01 processor 5 1 SLC 5 02 processors 5 3
43. BSN NA 40 4 0 1747 DCM NA 1 800 1 800 1747 KE NA 3 750 3 800 1747 KFC15 NA 3 200 3 200 1747 SCNR NA 45 45 1747 SDN NA 2 5 2 5 1747 SN NA 4 500 4 500 Peripheral Devices 1747 AlC NA 2 000 2 000 1747 DTAM NA 2 500 2 500 1747 PIC NA 2 000 2 000 1747 PSD NA NA NA 1761 NET AIc 2 NA 2 500 2 500 1761 NET DNI NA 2 500 2 500 1761 NET ENI W NA 2 000 2 000 1 Power supply loading for Series D and later modules 2 Current for the 1761 NET AIC and 1761 NET ENI may be supplied from the SLC power supply or from an external 24V de source Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 G 6 Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Power Supply Heat Dissipation Graphs Use the graphs below for determining the power supply dissipation in step 2 of the Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation 1746 P1 Power Supply Change in Power 1746 P2 Power Supply Change in Power Power Supply Dissipation Watts Power Supply Loading Watts 1746 P5 Power Supp 20 y Change in Power Dissipation due to Output Loading 5 Dissipation due to Output Loading gt Dissipation due to Output Loading 20 B 20 18 18 S 16 E 6 SS a a an 14 3
44. Controller with SLC SLC 5 03 Processor Slave 5 02 Processor and 1747 KE Interface Module Slave a RS 23Z DF1 Protocely lt Modular Controller with Modular Controller with SLC SLC 5 03 Processor Slave 5 02 Processor and 1747 KE Interface Module Slave Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 000000 Fixed Controller with 1747 KE Interface Module Slave Ca Modular Controller with SLC 5 01 Processor and 1747 KE Interface Module Slave Modular Controller with gt SLC 5 03 Processor A Master Mo Fixed Controller with 1747 KE Interface Module Slave Modular Controller with SLC 5 01 Processor and 1747 KE Interface Module Slave RS 232 Communication Interface B 7 DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Driver Series C FRN 6 FRN C 6 and higher versions of operating systems OS302 SLC 5 03 OS401 SLC 5 04 and OS501 SLC 5 05 include a channel 0 system mode driver called DF1 Radio Modem This driver implements a protocol optimized for use with radio modem networks that is a hybrid between DF1 Full Duplex protocol and DF1 Half Duplex protocol and therefore is not compatible with either of these protocols IMPORTANT The DF1 Radio Modem driver should only be used among devices that support and are configured for the DF1 Radio Modem protocol Only SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 processors with operating systems FRN C 6 support D
45. EN P February 2004 10 24 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Your The following will assist you in troubleshooting your output modules Output Modules Output Circuit Operation An output circuit controls the output signal in the following manner 1 Logic circuits determine the output status 2 An output LED indicates the status of the output signal 3 Opto electrical isolation separates output circuit logic and backplane circuits from field signals 4 The output driver turns the corresponding output on or off Logic Opto Electrical Logic Output Backplane a 3 a Circuits Isolation Circuits Drivers LED Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Troubleshooting 10 25 Troubleshooting Your Output Modules If your And Your And Probable Cause Recommended Action Output Output Device Circuit is LED is On On Energized Your program Programming problem Check for duplicate outputs and addresses using the indicates that the output circuit is off or the output circuit will not turn off search function If using subroutines outputs are left in their last state when not executing subroutines Use the force function to force output off If this does not force the output off output circuit is damaged If the output does force off then check again for logic programming problem Output is forced on in program Check processor FORCED 1 0 or FORCE LED and remove forces Output ci
46. Ground LY 170 to 250V ac S 1746 P6 ILI 85 to 132 PWR OUT 24V dc 9 170 to 250V ac User ra Power PWR OUT COM 1746 P4 OllZ NEUT 1746 P5 P6 and P7 HEV dc Chassis Giound V dc NEUT assis uroun Chassis Ground 1746 P7 User Not Used Power Not Used 12 24V dc V de NEUT 6 Chassis Ground Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Installing Your Hardware Components 6 11 Terminal screws on the 1746 P1 P2 P3 P5 P6 IMPORTANT and P7 should be tightened with a maximum torque of 1 Nm 8 8 in lbs Terminal screws on the 1746 P4 should be tightened with a max torque of 0 8 Nm 7 in lbs 4 Connect the ground screw of the power supply to the nearest ground or ground bus Use a 14 AWG 75 Deg Copper wire Category 1 per publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines and keep the leads as short as possible The 1746 P4 is shown below Tighten terminal screws to 0 8 Nm 7 in lbs 5 Remove the warning label from the top of the power supply 6 Connect line power to the power supply If you have a 1746 P3 see page 3 10 for special ATTENTION A grounding considerations Your SLC 500 power supply can be damaged by ATTENTION A the power supply from harmful voltage surges voltage surges when switching inductive loads such as motors motor starters solenoids
47. SLC 5 03 processor 5 6 SLC 5 04 processors 5 9 SLC 5 05 processors 5 12 FIFO First In First Out Glossary 5 file Glossary 5 full duplex point to point B 5 fuses for power supply installation 9 7 troubleshooting tips 10 3 G getting started quickly overview 1 1 procedures 1 2 Required Tools and Equipment 1 2 ground bus 3 9 grounding guidelines ground bus 3 7 overview 3 7 special considerations for DC applications using 1746 P3 3 10 H half duplex master protocol A B products that support B 5 hard disk Glossary 6 hazardous environment Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 component installation 3 3 selecting hardware components 2 26 heat preventing excessive 3 6 high byte Glossary 6 housekeeping Glossary 6 humidity processor specification 2 11 1 0 devices recommendations for wiring terminals identify 7 5 wires bundle 7 5 wires label 7 5 1 0 modules discrete 2 12 specialty 2 12 1 0 modules wiring 7 6 IBM AT connector pin assignment B 13 input modules installing 6 6 troubleshooting 10 22 wiring 7 6 input scan Glossary 6 input states on power down 3 15 installation chassis 1 3 6 2 chassis interconnect cables 6 12 getting started quickly 1 1 inspecting 8 2 lithium battery on SLC 5 01 or SLC 5 02 processors 9 3 lithium battery on SLC 5 03 and higher processors 9 4 memory modules 6 7 modules 6 6 power supplies 6 8 processors 6 5 typical SLC system 3 1 instruction Glossary 7 instru
48. Second Single Typed Read 1 33 33 Single Typed Reads 20 34 680 Single Typed Reads 100 34 3400 Single Typed Reads 256 31 7936 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 3 SLC 5 05 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network The SLC 5 05 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO IEC 8802 3 STD 802 3 and utilizes 10Base T media Connections are made directly from the SLC 5 05 to an Ethernet hub The network setup is simple and cost effective Typical network topology is pictured below Ethernet Network Topology RJ45 connectors on both ends of cable 10Base T Ethernet Hub to PC Ethernet Card to SLC 5 05 Channel 1 IMPORTANT The SLC 5 05 processor contains a 10Base T RJ45 Ethernet connector which connects to standard Ethernet hubs via 8 wire twisted pair straight through cable To access other Ethernet mediums use 10Base T media converters or Ethernet hubs that can be connected together via fiber thin wire or thick wire coaxial cables or any other physical media commercially available with Ethernet hubs Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 4 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Ethernet Connections Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Ethernet Channel 1 8 Pin 10Base T Connector The Ethernet connector is an RJ45 10Base T connector The pin out for the connector is shown below Pin Pin Name TD
49. Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1 to 65 500 minutes IP Address The SLC 5 05 internet address in network byte order The internet address must be 0 read write specified to connect to the TCP IP network undefined Subnet Mask The SLC 5 05 subnet mask in network byte order The Subnet Mask is used to interpret IP 0 read write addresses when the internet is divided into subnets A Subnet Mask of all zeros indicates that no subnet mask has been configured Gateway The address of a gateway in network byte order that provides connection to another IP 0 read write Address network A Gateway Address of all zeros indicates that no gateway has been configured BOOTP Enable The BOOTP enable switch When BOOTP is enabled the SLC 5 05 attempts to learn its 1 enabled read write network related parameters at powerup via a BOOTP request There must be a BOOTP server on the network capable of responding to this BOOTP request When BOOTP is disabled the SLC 5 05 uses the locally configured network related parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address etc Hardware The SLC 5 05 Ethernet hardware address Ethernet read only Address hardware address Configuration Using RSLogix 500 Programming Software Configuration Via BOOTP software Refer to the documentation provided with your programming BOOTP bootstrap protocol is a low level protocol that TCP IP nodes use to obtain start up information B
50. Transportation An exemption to these regulations DOT E7052 covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as flammable solids This exemption authorizes transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle rail freight cargo vessel and cargo only aircraft providing certain conditions are met Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted A special provision of DOT E7052 11th Rev October 21 1982 par 8 a provides that Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49 CFR 173 22a in any of these packages authorized in this exemption including those in which they were received The Code of Federal Regulations 49 CFR 173 22a relates to the use of packaging authorized under exemptions In part it requires that you must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the exemption Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by those countries such as the IATA Restricted Articles Regulations of the International Air Transport Association Geneva Switzerland IMPORTANT Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are periodically revised Maintaining Your Control System 9 3 Installing and Replacing the Battery of the SLC 5 01 or SLC 5 02 Processor Disposal A
51. UM011E EN P February 2004 E 22 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 To see the Sample Extended Format page 1 Go back to the User Provided Custom Data Table Monitor page 2 In the Address column click on the before an address to display the Sample Extended Format Click on the link under the file heading to display an ASCII dump of the ASCII file For example click on the 4116 to display the following screen e 1747 L552 File Dump Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor File Al16 Dump Address 1 2 4 5 6 9 ASCII A116 0 4142 4344 3030 3E0a 3c21 522D lt ABCDM OO gt lt ABDTR A116 3025 6421 6273 703B 2 66E 2020 0 0 d enbsp snbsp A116 3020 6465 6D61 6C3E OA3C 5452 0 0 decimal gt lt ABDTR A116 3430 2578 6E62 7370 3526 3B20 0 0 x nbsp nbsp A116 3430 2068 3E0A 3C21 4142 4F3A 0 0 hex gt lt ABDTR O A116 6221 266E 7038 266E 6273 4F34 0sb enbsp snbsp 0 A116 60 6269 6E61 sEoa 3c21 4142 4F34 0 binary gt lt ABDTR O A116 6F21 266E 7038 2 66E 6273 4F3A 0 0 enbsp snbsp O A116 6F 63 7461 nasc 2141 4244 3434 0 octal gt lt ABDTR S 4 A116 6421 266E 7038 266E 6273 486F O d enbsp enbsp Ho a116 100 733E Oa3c 4244 5452 2D53 6421 urs gt lt ABDTR 41 d
52. Your SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 processor provides back up power for RAM through a replaceable lithium battery This battery provides back up for approximately 2 years A BATT LED on the front of the processor alerts you when the battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level Maintaining Your Control System 9 5 To replace the lithium battery follow these steps Do not remove the processor from the SLC 500 ATTENTION ATTENTION chassis until all power is removed from the SLC 500 power supply 1 Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply 2 Remove the processor from the chassis by pressing the retainer clips at both the top and bottom of the module and slide it out ATTENTION Do not expose the processor to surfaces or other areas that may typically hold an electrostatic charge Electrostatic charges can alter or destroy memory 3 Unplug the battery connector The figure below shows the battery connector location Battery Connector IMPORTANT The SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors have a capacitor that provides at least 30 minutes of battery back up while the battery is disconnected Data in RAM is not lost if the battery is replaced within 30 minutes Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 9 6 Maintaining Your Control System 4 Remove the battery from the retaining clips 5 Insert a new battery into the battery retaining
53. a single network possible compared to DH 485 32 and DH 64 Data Highway Plus DH Protocol The Data Highway Plus protocol is used by the PLC 5 family of processors and the SLC 5 04 processor This protocol is similar to DH 485 except that it can support up to 64 devices nodes and runs at faster communication baud rates Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 8 Selecting Your Hardware Components Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 DH 485 Protocol The SLC 500 processors have a DH 485 channel that supports the DH 485 communication network This network is a multi master token passing network protocol capable of supporting up to 32 devices nodes This protocol allows e monitoring data and processor status along with program uploading and downloading of any device on the network from one location e SLC processors to pass data to each other peer to peer communication e operator interface devices on the network to access data from any SLC processor on the network DF1 Full Duplex Protocol DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol allows two devices to communicate with each other at the same time This protocol allows e transmission of information across modems dial up leased line radio or direct cable connections e communication to occur between Allen Bradley products and third party products DF1 Half Duplex Protocol Master and Slave DF1 Ha
54. as low as possible This minimizes the amount of time used in soliciting successors when initializing the network If all nodes are addressed in sequence from 0 and the maximum node address is equal to the address of the highest addressed node the token rotation will improve by the amount of time required to transmit a solicit successor packet plus the slot timeout value Note that this does not allow any node to be added to the network without affecting the response time On the other hand since the time required to hold an open station address is greater than the time required to pass a token it can be useful to leave a temporary device such as a personal computer connected if there is only one such device A solicit successor packet requires the same transmission time as the token pass but there is an added slot timeout period See your programming software user manual for the procedures to set node addresses processor baud rate and maximum node addresses Mattie T he SLC 500 Series A only processors set the maximum node address to 31 when power is cycled increasing initialization and response time of the network Maximum Number of Communicating Devices SLC 500 fixed and SLC 5 01 processors can be selected by two initiators maximum at the same time Using more than two initiators to select the same SLC 500 fixed and SLC 5 01 processors at the same time can cause communication timeouts Installing the DH 485 Networ
55. avoid possible personal injury and equipment damage IMPORTANT Do not attempt system start up until you are thoroughly familiar with the controller components and programming editing techniques You must also be thoroughly familiar with the particular application Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 8 2 Starting Up Your Control System For general recommendation concerning installation safety requirements and safety requirements and safety related work practices refer to the requirements specific to your region e Europe Reference the standards found in EN 60204 and your national regulations e United States refer to NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces 1 Inspect Your Installation You can often prevent serious problems in later test procedures by first making a thorough physical inspection We recommend that you do the following 1 Make sure that the controller and all other devices in the system are securely mounted 2 Check all wiring including e connections from the main disconnect to the controller input e the master control relay emergency stop circuit e input device circuits e output device circuits Make certain that all wiring connections are correct and that there are no missing wires Check the tightness of all terminals to make certain wires are secure 3 Measure the incoming line voltage Be certain that it corresponds to controller requirements and that it falls
56. be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system Understanding this concept is important Write the user program to take this effect into account For example hard wire power to one spare input In the user program check to be sure that one input is on otherwise jump to the end of the program and avoid scanning the logic Use of a common power source as recommended in the previous section is assumed Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 16 System Installation Recommendations Power Supply Undervoltage Operation SLC 500 controllers continue to operate hold up for a short period of time if the input voltage to the power supply drops below the recommended operating voltage range The controller continues to scan the user program and control I O during this time CPU hold up time is 20 ms to 3 seconds depending on the power supply and loading SLC 500 controllers turn OFF stop scanning and disable outputs if input voltage to the power supply is removed or drops below the recommended operating range for a period exceeding the CPU hold up time The controller resumes operation automatically when the input voltage is restored to normal If the input voltage to the 1746 P7 power supply falls into a range of 4 to 9V for a period exceeding the CPU hold up time the controller turns OFF and will not turn back ON until the input voltage is increased to 11V de SLC 500 Operation with 24V dc User Power O
57. chassis dissipation step 2 to the power supply dissipation step 5 8 Covert the value from step 7 to BTUs hr by multiplying the total heat dissipation of your controller by 3 414 1 If you have a device connected to user power multiply 24V dc by the amount of current used by that device Include user power in the total power supply loading Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 G 10 Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary Publication Number AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for data located in Input file word 1 bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides RS 232 isolation to an RS 485 Half Duplex communication link Catalog Number 1761 NET AIC application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific pur poses Auto Answer Type of modem that has self contained timeouts and tests They can answer and hang the phone up automatically Backplane Current Draw The amount of current the module requires from the backplane The sum of the backplane current draw for all module
58. clips 6 Plug the battery connector into the socket as shown in the figure on page 9 5 7 Insert the module back into the SLC 500 chassis 8 Restore power to the SLC 500 power supply Replacing Retainer Clips on If it becomes necessary to replace the retainer clip also called an 0 Module self locking tab order Catalog Number 1746 R15 4 per package Retainer Clip N Holding Tabs n Removing Damaged Retainer Clips If necessary pry off the broken retainer clip from the bottom with a screwdriver Do not twist it off You can damage the module Retainer Clip N Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Maintaining Your Control System 9 7 Installing New Retainer Clips Insert one of the pins of the retainer clip into the hole in the I O module and then snap the other end in place Replacing a Fuse on the To replace a fuse on the power supply only for the 1746 P1 P2 and P3 do the following Power Supply 1 Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply 2 Open the door on the power supply and use a fuse puller to remove the fuse ATTENTION Use only replacement fuses of the type and rating specified for the unit Improper fuse selection can result in equipment damage 3 Install a replacement fuse See page 2 14 for replacements See the figure below for fuse placement POWER
59. during 1 Verify battery is connected See page 9 3 PU Fault LED with Low or No power down ai Battery Back up 2 Replace the battery if you want RAM battery backup See page 9 3 If you want to back up RAM with the e Battery Low LED On capacitor in a SLC 5 01 1747 L511 add or replace the e All Other LEDs Off Battery Low LED jumper e A 3 ba to processor major fault recommended action matter Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 8 Troubleshooting Identifying SLC 5 02 Processor Communication Errors Table 10 2 SLC 5 02 Processor Communication Errors If the LEDs Indicate Power LED On Comm LED Off CPU Fault LED Off or Flashing Status of Run Forced 0 and Battery Low LEDs does not matter The Following Error Exists The SLC 5 02 processor is not receiving data No communication to the programmer Probable Cause DH 485 communication parameters are improperly set up Recommended Action N ow Check communication parameters of programmer Programmer and processor baud rate must match Programmer and processor node addresses must be different Try different combinations of a baud rate default is 19 2K b node address default is 1 Try to increase the maximum node address default is 31 Bad Connection of Communication Device is N oo Check cable continuity Check cable connections between programmer and processor
60. gateway that Enter an address of the following form provides a connection to another IP network This field is required when you communicate with other devices not on a local subnet a b c d Where a b c d are between 0 to 255 decimal The default address is No Gateway Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 12 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network SLC 5 05 Embedded Web Server Capability Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 SLC 5 05 processors with OS501 Series C FRN 6 or higher include not only the embedded web server introduced in FRN 5 which allows viewing of module information TCP IP configuration and diagnostic information but an enhanced version that also allows viewing of the data table memory map data table monitor screen and user provided web pages via Ethernet using a standard web browser In order to view the web server main menu from a standard web browser type in http www xxx yyy zzz for the web address where WWW XXX yyy Zzz is the IP address of the SLC 5 05 processor The following topics appear on the home page main menu as shown below e Module Information e TCP IP Configuration e Diagnostic Information e Data Table Memory Map e Data Table Monitor e User Provided Pages AJ 1747 L552 Home Page Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation E3 Eie Edit View Favorites Tools Help EJ Rockwell Automation 1747 L
61. give you a lower more accurate heat dissipation calculation than the total watts method With this method use the formula below for calculating the heat dissipation of each module Then use these values in step 1 of the Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation on page G 8 points energized x watts per point minimum watts heat dissipation of module Use total watts if you are not sure how many points on a module are energized at any time Total watts is the watts per point with all points energized plus the minimum watts Total watts generated by each module are provided in the table on page G 3 Once you have determined which method you will use to calculate the heat dissipation of your modules see the Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation on page G 8 This worksheet shows you how to calculate the heat dissipation for the example SLC control system on page G 7 Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System G 3 Power Supply Loading Reference Table Use the table below to calculate the power supply loading and heat dissipation for each chassis in your SLC modular application Hardware Catalog Numbers Watts per Point Minimum Watts Total Watts _ Component Processors 1747 L511 NA 1 75 1 75 1747 L514 NA 1 75 1 75 1747 L524 NA 1 75 1 75 1747 1531 NA 1 75 1 75 1747 L532 NA 2 90 2 90 1747 1541 NA 4 00
62. in transistor outputs and is common to solid state devices A transient pulse can occur regardless of the processor having power or not Transient Pulse On State Load Current Current Transient I Duration of Transient T Time To reduce the possibility of inadvertent operation of devices connected to transistor outputs adhere to the following guidelines e Either ensure that any programmable device connected to the transistor output is programmed to ignore all output signals until after the transient pulse has ended e or add an external resistor in parallel to the load to increase the on state load current The duration of the transient pulse is reduced when the on state load current is increased Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 32 Selecting Your Hardware Components Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The duration of the transient pulse is proportional to the load impedance This is illustrated in the following graph SRR E ee ae ft tt E E ft A Duration of Transient ms 1 100 20 30 40 50 60 700 80 900 1000 On State Load Current mA Increasing the load current by 100 mA decreases the transient time from approximately 7 ms to less than 2 5 ms To calculate the size of the resistor added in parallel to increase the current use the following information 24V your applied voltage Need 100 mA of load current to reduce the tra
63. is attached directly to the phone lines The interface module or the SLC 5 03 processor acts as the Data Terminal Equipment DTE which controls the modem via the DTR and RTS signals The module incorporates timeouts and tests to properly operate these types of modems Glossary 5 DTR Dialing SLC 5 03 only Type of modem that lets you dial a number or end a call based on the status of the RS232 DTR Data Terminal Ready signal To program the modem initialization string and phone number into the internal memory of the modem use a dumb terminal or PC running terminal emulation software like Procomm Window s Terminal or PBASE Once you have programmed the modem activate the DTR signal to dial the number or deactivate the DTR signal to end the call EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory module used to store back up or transfer SLC 500 programs The SLC 500 can read and write to an EEPROM EMI Electromagnetic interference encoder A device that detects position and transmits a signal representing that position Ethernet Network A local area network with a baseband communication rate of 10M bits per second executing mode Any run or test mode false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FIFO First In First Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file file A collection of data or logic organized into groups Publ
64. listed to US and Canadian throughout manual Safety Standards Added and updated illustrations throughout manual Added Install the chassis to Quick Start for Experienced 1 3 through 1 4 Users chapter Revised communication parameter table 1 10 Updated power supply specifications 2 14 through 2 15 Added System Overview section 3 2 through 3 3 Updated grounding guidelines 3 7 through 3 11 Added Power Supply Undervoltage Operation section 3 16 Added DF1 Radio Modem to list of SLC processor features 5 6 5 9 and 5 12 Added logical ASCII addressing in PLC 5 type messages 9 6 and 5 9 Updated information on installing your chassis 6 2 through 6 4 Updated information on installing your processor 6 5 Updated octal label kit availability information 7 7 Removed references to product pricing 11 3 through 11 4 Updated module ratings and product offerings F 1 through F 3 and G 3 through G 5 Updated heat dissipation worksheet G 8 through G 9 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 Summary of Changes Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Quick Start for Experienced Users Selecting Your Hardware Components Table of Contents Preface Who Should Use this Manual 0005 P 1 Purpose of this Manual naa any dae pea eee eins P 1 Related Documentation ig suis aaae P 2 Common Techniques Used in this Manual
65. multi point list e UL listed to US and Canadian Safety Standards CE compliant C Tick marked Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 5 10 Identifying the Components of Your Processor This figure below shows some of the hardware components of the SLC 5 04 processors 1747 L541 1747 L542 or 1747 L543 A SLC 5 04 CPU L H RUN FORCE FLT DH L BATT RS232 RUN REM PROG Battery provides back up T Memory power for the Module CMOS RAM Keyswitch N oh A Channel 1 o DH 485 DF1 a or ASCII pa G Pi Channel 0 No oO o Operating System Download Protection Jumper do not move unless updating processor EN Serial Number and Left Side View Front View Operating System firmware Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Catalog Number The table below provides a general explanation of each processor status LED on the SLC 5 04 processors Processor Lep 2 RUN Color green When It Is Indicates that On steady The processor is in the Run mode Flashing during The processor is transferring a program from operation RAM to the memory module Off The processor is in a mode other than Run FLT Flashing at power up The processor has not been config
66. on the RTB label ATTENTION Disconnect power before attempting to install or remove I O modules or their terminal blocks 3 Disconnect power 4 Align the terminal block release screws with the mating connector in the module 5 Press the RTB firmly onto the connector contacts 6 Tighten the terminal block release screws To avoid cracking the terminal block alternate the tightening of the screws 26 ro E Terminal Block Release Screws Maximum Torque 0 9 Nm 8 in lbs O a Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Procedures for Starting the Control System Chapter 8 Starting Up Your Control System This chapter describes how to start up your control system To accomplish this you must go through eight procedures Start up involves the following procedures to be carried out in sequence 1 2 3 8 Inspect your installation Disconnect motion causing devices Initialize and test your processor Test your inputs Test your outputs Enter and test your program Observe control motion Conduct a dry run of your application These procedures isolate problems such as wiring mistakes equipment malfunction and programming errors in a systematic controlled manner Go through these procedures very carefully to
67. output troubleshooting see page 10 24 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Starting Up Your Control System 8 9 6 Enter and Test Your After you test all inputs and outputs and they are functioning Program 1 4 properly follow the steps below to safely and successfully enter and test your specific application program Verify the offline program After the program has been entered in the offline edit file mode program verification may begin Remaining in the offline edit file mode use the cursor keys and or search function of your programming device to inspect every instruction and rung for errors Check your written program rung for rung against the program entered into the offline memory The most common errors found in program entry are e incorrect addressing of instructions e omission of an instruction e more than one output instruction programmed using the same address Transfer the program into the processor a Place your programming device online b Place the processor into Program mode c Select the download function when using the Hand Held Terminal or the restore function when using your programming software Verify the online program transfer a Select monitor file function b Cursor through the program to verify that you selected the right program Conduct a single scan program test a Select the monitor file function and place the cursor on the first rung b Select t
68. processor The larger versions also offer DH 485 RJ 45 DH Remote I O Ethernet DeviceNet and ControlNet network connectivity The PanelView 300 Micro and 300 Keypad terminals provide compact low cost operator interfaces for low end graphical or text only applications each with a 3 inch 7 6 cm diagonal LCD monochrome graphic display and DF1 DH 485 RS 232 and DeviceNet 300 Keypad only communications capability The PanelView 550 with its 5 5 inch 14 cm diagonal monochrome LCD display and PanelView 600 with its 6 inch 15 2 cm diagonal TFT active matrix color display offer keypad keypad touch and touch only versions Both offer all networking options for maximum flexibility in a smaller form factor PanelView 1000 offers keypad and touch screen terminals with 10 4 inch 26 4 cm diagonal TFT active matrix color or electro luminescent grayscale displays and all networking options The PanelView 1400 the largest terminal in the PanelView family has a 14 inch 35 6 cm diagonal CRT color display and supports all networking options Selecting a Memory You can plug these optional EEPROM Electrically Erasable Module for the SLC5 01 and Programmable Read Only Memory memory modules into the SLC 500 controller With a memory module you can SLC 5 02 Processors e save the contents of the processor RAM for storage purposes e load the contents of the EEPROM memory into the processor RAM Adapter sockets 1747 M5 are
69. run mode Glossary 13 RUN keyswitch position for SLC 5 03 and SLC 5 04 processors 5 15 rung Glossary 13 S Safety Considerations 3 17 master control relay circuits periodic tests of 3 18 Power Distribution 3 17 Safety Circuits 3 17 save Glossary 13 SCADA applications B 1 scan Glossary 13 scan time Glossary 13 selecting contact protection 2 29 discrete I O modules 2 12 enclosures 2 18 isolation transformers 2 25 processors 2 5 SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 memory modules 2 21 SLC 5 03 and higher memory modules 2 22 speciality I O modules 2 12 surge suppressors 2 27 Several B 5 shock operating processor specification 2 11 sinking Glossary 13 sinking and sourcing 7 1 contact output circuits 7 2 Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit 7 3 Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit 7 3 solidstate DC 1 0 circuits 7 2 Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module 7 2 Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit 7 3 slave devices DF1 half duplex protocol B 5 SLC 5 05 processors Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 see 5 05 processors SLC 5 0x compatible cables 1 2 SLC 5 0x compatible interfaces 1 2 SLC 500 Programmable Controllers general specifications 2 11 installing 6 5 selecting a memory module 2 21 2 22 selecting a processor 2 5 Selecting Discrete I O Modules 2 12 Selecting Enclosures 2 18 Selecting Isloation Transformers 2 25 Selecting Speciality 1 0 Modules 2 12 Special C
70. software programming or data acquisition across DH to DH 485 1784 KTX KTXD PC DH 485 Interface ISA Bus Provides DH485 or DH connection 1784 6 5 22 Card 1784 PCMK PCMCIA Interface PCMCIA slotin Provides DH485 or DH connection 1784 6 5 19 Card computer Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 4 Setting Up the DH 485 Network Catalog Number Description Installation Function Publication Requirement 2707 L8P1 L8P2 DIAM Plus and Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 2707 800 L40P1 L40P2 DTAM Micro processors 2707 803 V40P1 V40P2 Operator Interfaces V40P2N M232P3 and M485P3 2711 K5A2 PanelView 550 and Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 2711 UM014D B5A2 K5A5 PanelView 900 processors B5A5 K5A1 Operator Terminals BBA1 K9A2 T9A2 K9A5 T9A5 K9A1 and T9A1 1784 PKTX PC DH 485 Interface PCI Bus Provides DH 485 or DH connection 1784 6 5 27 PKTXD Card 1747 AlC Isolated Link Coupler for DH 485 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The isolated link coupler 1747 AIC is used to connect SLC 500 family devices to the DH 485 network as shown on page A 5 The coupler provides a 6 position removable terminal block for connection to the DH 485 communication cable Network connections for SLC 500 processors are provided by the Catalog Number 1747 C11 304 8 mm 12 in cabl
71. supply dissipation 6 Add he chassis dissipation step si Oo o fide a Fe O 2 to the power supply dissipation step 5 he values together from step 6 across to the right oap o i 13 59 35 8 2 Add the heat dissipation values together for your total chassis heat dissipation hassis Number 3 Peripheral Dev 4 Add toge loadi 5 Use step he heat dissipation values her for your power supply ng he power supply loading 4 for each chassis and the graphs on page G 6 to determine power supply dissipation 6 Add he chassis dissipation step 2 to the power supply dissipation step 5 rt the value from step 7 to BTUs hr by multiplying the total heat dissipation of your controller by 3 414 have a device connected to user power multiply 24V dc by the amount of current used by that device Include user power in the total power supply loading Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System G 9 Blank Worksheet Procedure for calculating the total heat dissipation for the controller 1 Write in the total watts dissipated by the processor 1 0 and speciality modules and any peripheral devices attached to the processor Chassis Number 1 Chassis Number 2 Chassis Number 3 Catalog No Heat Dis Catalog No Heat Dis Catalog No Heat Dis Watts Watts Watts as eripheral Dev eripheral Dev eripheral Dev me 0 D eripheral Dev eripheral Dev
72. suppressor These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular inductive device For inductive DC load devices a diode is suitable A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications A surge suppressor can also be used See the table on page 2 29 Locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device Transistor Output Transient Pulses This section applies to the following SLC 500 fixed I O processors and SLC 500 I O modules that have transistor outputs Fixed 1 0 processors with 1 0 modules with transistor outputs transistor outputs e 1747 L20E e 1746 0B8 e 1746 OBP16 e 1747 L20G e 1746 OBP8 e 1746 0V16 e 1747 L20L e 1746 0V8 e 1746 OVP16 e 1747 L20N e 1746 0B16 e 1746 0B32 e 1747 L30L e 1746 OB16E e 1746 0B32E e 1747 L40E e 1746 0B16El e 1746 032 e 1747 L40L Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 31 For the SLC 500 products listed above the maximum duration of the transient pulse occurs when minimum load is connected to the output However for most applications the energy of the transient pulse is not sufficient to energize the load A transient pulse occurs in transistor outputs when the ATTENTION i external DC supply voltage is applied to the common output terminals e g via the master control relay The sudden application of voltage creates this transient pulse See the following graph This condition is inherent
73. tT q e NE DH 485 DF1 eee HOUUOOUOTTTY l e or ASCII x Nee Channel 0 Operating System Download Protection Jumper L serial Numb d do not move unless updating processor Left Side View a Front View Operating System firmware Catalog Number Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 5 8 Identifying the Components of Your Processor Processor LED 2 RUN Color green When It Is On steady The table below provides a general explanation of each processor status LED on the SLC 5 03 processor Indicates that The processor is in the Run mode Flashing during operation The processor is transferring a program from RAM to the memory module Off The processor is in a mode other than Run FLT Flashing at power up The processor has not been configured iGolor red Flashing during operation The processor detects a major error either in the processor chassis or memory On steady A fatal error is present no communications Off There are no errors BATT On steady The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level or the battery is missing or not Color red connected Off The battery is functional FORCE Flashing One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the Color amber forces have not been enabled On steady The forces have been enabled Off No forces are present or enabled DH 485 On ste
74. the 1747 L511 and two years for the 1747 L514 and 1747 1524 A red BATTERY LOW LED alerts you when the battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level Once the BATTERY LOW LED goes on do not remove processor power or your program may be lost Replace the battery as soon as possible You can replace the battery while the processor is powered Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 9 4 Maintaining Your Control System Replacing Your SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Battery Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 For battery installation or replacement do the following 1 Open the door of the processor 2 If you are installing a battery in a new processor battery never installed before remove the jumper from the battery connector socket Store the jumper in safe place for possible future use without the battery replacing an old battery unplug the existing battery connector and remove from the retainer clips The figure below shows where to install the battery in a SLC 5 01 or SLC 5 02 processor 3 Insert a new or replacement battery in the holder making sure it is held in by the retainer clips 4 Plug the battery connector into the socket See the following figure White N la F F Red Lead SX san a N Connector l er Retainer oS 5 Clips w Sg co D a 5 Close the processor door
75. useful in control environments with a broad mix of electrical I O circuit requirements Solid State DC 1 0 Circuits The design of DC field devices typically requires that they be used in a specific sinking or sourcing circuit depending on the internal circuitry of the device DC input and output field circuits are commonly used with field devices that have some form of internal solid state circuitry that need a DC signal voltage to function Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module Circuit The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between the supply and the input terminal When the field device is activated it sources current to the input circuit Field Device DC Power Input Supply Circuit Wiring Your I O Modules 7 3 Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between the supply and the input terminal When the field device is activated it sinks current from the input circuit i lt Field Device DC DC Power die Supply Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between the supply and the output terminal When the output is activated it sources current to the field device Field Device DC Output Circuit DC Power Supply Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit The field device is on the positive side of the power supply
76. within the specified voltage range See specifications for input voltage ranges on page 2 14 2 Disconnect In the following test procedures the controller is energized As a Motion Causing Device safety precaution you must make certain that machine motion does not occur The preferred way is to disconnect the motor wires at the motor starter or the motor itself In this way you can test the operation of the starter coil verifying that your output circuit is wired correctly and functioning Similarly the preferred way to disconnect a solenoid is to disengage the valve leaving the coil connected In some instances you may not be able to disconnect a device the preferred way In this case it is necessary to open the output circuit at some convenient point Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Starting Up Your Control System 8 3 3 Initialize and Test Your Processor For circuit testing purposes it is best to open the circuit at a point as close as possible to the motion causing device For example your output might be a relay coil that in turn energizes a motor starter if it is impractical to disconnect the motor wires the next best thing to do is to open the circuit at a point between the motor starter and the relay contact ATTENTION Machine motion during system checkout can be hazardous to personnel During the checkout procedures 3 4 5 and 6 you must disconnect all devices that when energize
77. without opening the enclosure Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened power to input and output devices is stopped When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I O circuits power continues to be provided to the controllers power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de energize I O devices only When inspecting or installing terminal connections replacing output fuses or working on System Installation Recommendations 3 13 Power Considerations equipment within the enclosure use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system IMPORTANT The operator must not control the master control relay with the processor Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the master control relay Emergency Stop Switches Adhere to the following points concerning emergency stop switches e Do not program emergency stop switches in the controller program Any emergency stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay e Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency stop switches e Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system Make certai
78. 0 2020 2020 O00 Keyswitch Mother Board Right Side View Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 22 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Your Input The following will assist you in troubleshooting your input modules Modules Input Circuit Operation An input circuit responds to an input signal in the following manner 1 An input filter removes false signals due to contact bounce or electrical interference 2 Opto electrical isolation protects the input circuit and backplane circuits by isolating logic circuits from input signals 3 Logic circuits process the signal 4 An input LED turns on or off indicating the status of the corresponding input device Input Opto Electrical Logic tetas Si Backplane Input gt Conditioning Isolation Circuits p Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Troubleshooting 10 23 Troubleshooting Your Input Modules If your Input And Your Input And Probable Cause Recommended Action Circuit LED is Device is On On Closed Activated Your input device will notturn Device is shorted or Verify device operation Replace off damaged device Your program operates as Input circuit is Verify proper wiring Try other input though it is off damaged circuit Replace module Input is forced off in Check the FORCED 1 0 or FORCE LED program on processor and remove forces Off O
79. 0 m 1 ft from lines of 100k VA or more Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference If you route the cable through conduit follow these additional recommendations Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference You can use aluminum conduit in non critical areas Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid to hold both sections at the same potential Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit The conduit should contain only serial communication cables Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental specifications For more information on planning cable routes see Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication Number 1770 4 1 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 11 Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on networ
80. 0 watts 1 Power supply fuse is to guard against fire hazard due to short circuit conditions Fuse may not protect the supply from miswiring or excessive transient in the power line No isolation between input terminals and backplane However dielectric withstand between input terminals and chassis ground terminal is 600V ac RMS for 1 s Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 15 Power Supply Specifications 1746 P5 P6 and P7 Description Specification 1746 P5 P6 P7 Line Voltage 90 146V de 30 60V dc 10 30V de Typical Line Power Requirement 85 VA 100 VA 12V dc input 50 VA 24V dc input 75 VA Maximum Inrush Current 20A 20A required for turn on Internal Current Capacity 5A at 5V de 12V dc input 24V dc input 0 96A at 24V dc 2 0A at 5V de 0 46A at 24V 3 6A at 5V dc dc 0 87A at 24V dc See P7 current capacity chart Fuse Protectionl Fuse is soldered in place 24V dc User Power Current Capacity 200 mA Not Applicable 24V dc User Power Voltage Range 18 30V dc Ambient Operating Temp 0 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F Current capacity is derated 5 above 55 C Isolation 1800V ac RMS for 1 s 600V ac RMS for 1 s CPU Hold up Time 20 ms full load 5 ms full load 12V de input 24V de input 3000 ms no load 1500 ms no load 1 37 ms at OV dc full load 895 ms at OV dc no load 10 ms at 9V dc full load continuous at 9V dc no load 40 ms at OV dc full l
81. 04 1 6 Quick Start for Experienced Users 4 Make jumper selection for 120 240V ac on 1746 P1 1746 P2 and 1746 P4 power supplies Reference Place the input voltage jumper to match the input voltage This does not apply to Chapter 6 the 1746 P3 P5 P6 or P7 which do not have jumpers Installing Your Hardware Components ATTENTION Set the input jumper before applying power Hazardous voltage is present on exposed pins when power is applied contact with the pin may cause injury to personnel Catalog Numbers 1746 P1 and P2 Catalog Number 1746 P4 PowER Jumper Selection PONER 85 132 VAC Fuse 73 re tn cere U o a Ie Jumper Selection HA Cc 170 250 VAC 100 120 Volts 200 240 Volts Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Quick Start for Experienced Users 1 7 5 Wire power to the power supply Reference Chapter 6 Installing Your Hardware Turn off incoming power before connecting wires Failure to Components ATTENTION eae do so could cause injury to personnel and or equipment Connect incoming power 1746 P1 and P2 1746 P3 PWR OUT 24V dc NOT USED User Power lt a H PWR OUT COM User Power NOT USED 120 240V ac 24V de In
82. 1747 PIC or Expansion Chassis 1747 UIC D 6 Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC DH 485 Network cor Advanced Interfaie max length 1219 m 4 000 ft m Converter 1747 AIC E TT7A7 AIC us 1747 Alc TIAC i i 14 Isolated Eo jo s Link a 7 1747 AlC Coupler Lo te je DataTable eee i Access ame co i Module j S L or SLC 500 20 Point SLC 5 01 Modular Controller j j Fixed Controller SLC 500 Fixed Controller Tagg ES oojo o SLC 5 02 Modular Controller Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 8 Setting Up the DH 485 Network Configuring the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Channel 0 for DH485 The RS 232 port channel 0 of the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processor can be configured for DH485 protocol Refer to your programming software user manual for software configuration information You can connect channel 0 of the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors to a DH485 network using the 1747 CP3 cable and a 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface Converter AIC In this case the AIC must be powered with 24V dc The 1746 P1 P2 P4 P5 and P6 power supplies provide 24V dc user power which may be used to power the AIC
83. 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 12 System Installation Recommendations Master Control Relay Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A hard wired master control relay supplied by you provides a convenient means for emergency controller shutdown Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency stop switches in different locations its installation is important from a safety standpoint Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens the master control relay is de energized This removes power to input and output device circuits se circuits feat their function ATTENTION Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury and or machine damage could f occur If you are using a DC power supply interrupt the DC IMPORTANT IMPORTANT side rather than the AC side to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn on and turn off The DC power supply should receive its power directly from the fused secondary of the transformer Connect the power to the DC input and output circuits through a set of master control relay contacts Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure so that you can disconnect power
84. 1E EN P February 2004 The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH 485 network The protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used A node holding the token can send any valid packet onto the network Each node is allowed only one transmission plus two retries each time it receives the token After a node sends one message packet it attempts to give the token to its successor by sending a token pass packet to its successor If no network activity occurs the initiator sends the token pass packet again After two retries a total of three tries the initiator will attempt to find a new successor IMPORTANT The maximum address that the initiator will search for before wrapping to zero is the value in the configurable parameter maximum node address The default value for this parameter is 31 for all initiators and responders The allowable range of the node address of a initiator is 0 to 31 The allowable address range for all responders is 1 to 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network Network initialization begins when a period of inactivity exceeding the time of a link dead timeout is detected by a initiator on the network When the time for a link dead timeout is exceeded u
85. 2004 Troubleshooting 10 9 Troubleshooting the oe the time you apply power to an SLC 5 03 o or SLC 5 05 processor and the communications are established via a SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and connected programming device the only form of communication SLC 5 05 Processors between you and the processor is through the LED display When power is applied all of the LEDs flash on and then off while the processor conducts hardware tests This is part of the normal powerup sequence Following the selftest by the processor all the LEDs again flash on momentarily If a user program is in a running state the RUN LED will be on If a fault exists within the processor the FLT LED is on To receive the maximum benefit of this troubleshooting section follow these steps 1 Identify the status of your processor LEDs See Chapter 5 for description of LEDs and their different states 2 Using the tables on the following pages match your processor and power supply LEDs with the status LEDs located in the first column 3 Once the status LEDs are matched to the appropriate table move across the table identifying error description and probable causes 4 Then follow the recommended action steps for each probable cause until the cause is identified 5 If recommended actions do not identify the trouble cause contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or distributor Clearing SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Faults Using the Key
86. 20V ac inductive loads e Harris MOV part number V220 MA2A or e Allen Bradley MOV Catalog Number 599 K04 or 599 KA04 Series C or later Consult the varistor manufacturer s data sheet when selecting a varistor for your application Damage could occur to SLC 500 triac outputs if you ATTENTION use suppressors having RC networks Allen Bradley AC surge suppressors not recommended for use with triacs include Catalog Numbers 199 FSMA1 199 FSMA2 1401 N10 and 700 N24 Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 29 Allen Bradley surge suppressors recommended for use with Allen Bradley relays contactors and starters are shown in the table below Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog No Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 120V ac 599 K04 Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 240V ac 599 KA0a Bulletin 100 Conductor 120V ac 199 FSMAI 2 Bulletin 100 Conductor 240V ac 199 FSMAQ 2 Bulletin 709 Motor Starter 120V ac 1401 N10 2 Bulletin 700 Type R RM Relays AC coil None Required Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 12V de 199 FSMA9 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 12V de Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 24V de 199 FSMA9 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 24V de Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 48V dc 199 FSMA9 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 48V dc Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 115 125V dc 199 FSM10 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 115 125V dc Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 230 250V dc 199 FSMA11 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 230 250V dc
87. 4 00 1747 L542 NA 4 00 4 00 1747 L543 NA 4 00 4 00 1747 L551 NA 4 00 4 00 1747 L552 NA 4 00 4 00 1747 L553 NA 4 00 4 00 Digital Input Modules 1746 1A4 0 270 0 175 1 30 1746 1A8 0 270 0 250 2 40 1746 1A16 0 270 0 425 4 80 1746 IB8 0 200 0 250 1 90 1746 1B16 0 200 0 425 3 60 1746 1B32 0 200 0 530 6 90 1746 1C16 0 220 0 425 3 95 1746 1G16 0 020 0 700 1 00 1746 1H16 0 320 0 675 3 08 1746 IM4 0 350 0 175 1 60 1746 IM8 0 350 0 250 3 10 1746 IM16 0 350 0 425 6 00 1746 IN16 0 350 0 425 6 00 1746 ITB16 0 200 0 425 3 625 1746 ITV16 0 200 0 425 3 625 1746 IV8 0 200 0 250 1 90 1746 IV16 0 200 0 425 3 60 1746 1V32 0 200 0 530 6 90 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 G 4 Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System Hardware Catalog Numbers Watts per Point Minimum Watts Total Watts Component Digital Output Modules 1746 0A8 1 000 0 925 9 00 1746 0A16 0 462 1 850 9 30 1746 OAP12 1 000 1 850 10 85 1746 OB6El 0 440 0 230 2 90 1746 0B8 0 775 0 675 6 90 1746 0B16 0 338 1 400 7 60 1746 0B16E 0 338 1 400 7 60 1746 0B32 0 078 2 260 4 80 1746 0B32E 0 078 2 260 4 80 1746 0BP8 0 300 0 675 3 08 1746 0BP16 0 310 1 250 6 21 1746 0G16 0 033 0 900 1 50 1746 0V8 0 775 0 675 6 90 1746 0V16 0 388 1 400 7 60 1746 0V32 0 078 2 260 4 80 1746 0VP16 0 310 1 250 6 21 1746 0W4 0 133 1 310 1 90 1746 0
88. 552 Module Information TCP IP Configuration E t h ern et Diagnostic Information Data Table Memory Map P rocessor Data Table Monitor User Provided Pages Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 13 Module Information The module information page displays a table with information about the processor The specific information displayed includes the processor model series revision of the processor mode of the processor and the name of the program in the processor Also displayed is the revision build of the Ethernet firmware and the module uptime time since power was last applied 1747 1552 Module Information Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation E3 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor Module Information Processor SLC 5 05 1747 L552 32K Series Revision C 6 Processor Mode Program Program Name SLC_WEB Firmware Identification 1747_slc 2 50 07 Oct 02 Module Uptime 4 days 02h 55m 04s Module Home Page Module Information TCP IP Configuration Diagnostic Information Memory Map D T Monitor User Provided Pages a TCP IP Configuration Data Read Only This page displays a table with information about the current TCP IP configuration parameters Included are the module s IP address the subnet mask gateway address the Ethernet hardware address
89. 7 UM011E EN P February 2004 Processor When It Is Indicates that LED FORCE Flashing One or more input or output addresses have Color amber been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled On steady The forces have been enabled Off No forces are present or enabled ENET Solid Green The Ethernet port is functioning properly and is Channel 1 connected to an active Ethernet network Color green or red Flashing Green The Ethernet port is functioning properly connected to an active Ethernet network and is transmitting packets Flashing Red A hardware or software fault has occurred and is being reported via a code Contact Allen Bradley Global Technical Services for assistance Off No Ethernet connection or processor halted RS 232 On steady The SLC 5 05 processor is transmitting on the Channel 0 DF1 ASCII Mode network olore aieen Off The SLC 5 05 processor is not transmitting on DF1 ASCII Mode the network On steady The Channel 0 Communications Active Bit DH 485 Mode S 33 4 is set in the System Status file and the processor is actively communicating on the network Flashing The processor is trying to establish DH 485 Mode communications but there are no other active nodes on the DH 485 network Off A fatal error is present no communications DH 485 Mode Identifying the Components of Your Processor 5 15 Keyswitch for the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 an
90. 747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Input Troubleshooting Steps 1 2 Make sure the processor is in the Continuous Scan Test mode If associated bit status and LED status do not match the input device status check status file 11 and S 12 I O slot enables Bits S 11 0 through 11 15 and S 12 0 through S 12 14 should all be 1 enabling all I O slots for the modular system Verify proper control power to the input device Remove the input device power and make sure circuit terminations are properly wired and tightened Re energize the input device power and check for proper control voltage between the input terminal and signal common terminal If proper input control voltage does not exist first check minimum signal common by verifying voltage between input device power source and the input common terminal If proper input voltage does exist first check the minimum input current specification on the input module and then measure the current in the input circuit Replace the input module if necessary If the input modules check out OK and proper voltage is measured between input device source and input module common terminal test the input device and replace if necessary For more information on input troubleshooting see page 10 23 After you test all inputs and have determined that they are functioning properly test the outputs following these steps 1 2 Refer to page 8 2 to insur
91. AB Allen Bradley SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style Catalog Numbers 1747 L511 1747 L514 1747 L524 1747 L531 1747 L532 1747 L541 1747 L542 1747 L543 1747 L551 1747 L552 1747 L553 User Manual Rockwell Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www ab com manuals gi describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with
92. ATA A In this case use terminal numbers only and ignore signal names DATA B and DATA A The internal circuitry of the Series A is the same as Series B Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 16 Setting Up the DH 485 Network Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network Only one of the link couplers at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 of the network connector jumpered together This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable Link couplers at both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 of the link connectors jumpered together This connects the termination impedance of 120Q that is built into each link coupler as required by the DH 485 specification See the figure below for the proper jumpering End of Line Termination Jumper Jumper ee aoe J Belden 9842 Cable 1219m 4 000 ft maximum length NGN Wy ae SSSSSS Jumper Powering the Link Coupler In normal operation with the programmable controller connected to the link coupler the processor powers both the link coupler and peripheral device DTAM PIC if connected through the C11 cable If you do not connect the processor to the link coupler then use a 24V dc power supply to power the link coupler and peripheral device The 1747 AIC requires 85 mA at 24V dc With a peripheral device connected the total current requi
93. Ampere 1746 F5 Catalog Numbers for 1746 OBP16 and 1746 OVP16 output modules 1746 F8 Catalog Numbers for 1746 OAP12 output module 1746 F9 Modular Card Slot Fillers Two fillers per package Orders must be for multiples of two 1746 N2 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 11 4 Replacement Parts Description Catalog Number Connector Mating Connector for 32 point user made cable 1746 N3 Kit consisting of 4 replacement terminal covers and labels for 4 8 16 1 0 modules 1746 R9 Replacement Covers and Labels Two covers per package Orders must be for multiples of two covers Catalog Number for 1746 P1 1746 R10 Catalog Numbers for 1746 P2 and P3 power supplies 1746 R11 SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processors 1746 R12 Specialty 1 0 1746 R13 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor 1746 R14 Catalog Number for 1747 ASB 1746 R16 Replacement Fuse Holder for Catalog Number 1746 OAP12 Two fuse holders per package Orders must be for 1746 R17 multiples of two Price is per holder Replacement Retainer Clips Four clips per package Orders must be for multiples of four 1746 R15 Replacement Remote 1 0 Address Labels Includes five labels for remote PLC system and five labels for remote SLC 1746 RL35 system Replacement Octal Label Kit Kit includes one octal LED label and one door la
94. C7 cable 6 12 1746 C9 cable 6 12 1746 P1 power supply installing 6 8 replacing fuse 9 7 1746 P2 power supply installing 6 8 replacing fuse 9 7 1746 P3 power supply installing 6 8 replacing fuse 9 7 special considerations for grounding 3 10 1746 P4 power supply installing 6 8 1747 AlC link coupler connecting the communication cable A 14 using on the DH 485 network A 4 1747 BA lithium battery 2 12 1747 KE module as an RS 232 communication device B 3 on the DH 485 network A 3 1747 KFC15 D 6 1747 KTX 1 2 1747 L511 processor 5 1 F 1 G 3 1747 L514 processor 5 1 F 1 G 3 1747 L524 processor 5 3 F 1 G 3 1747 L531 processor G 3 1747 L532 processor 5 6 F 1 G 3 1747 L541 processor 5 9 F 1 G 3 1747 L542 processor 5 9 F 1 G 3 1747 L543 processor 5 9 F 1 G 3 1747 L551 processor 5 12 5 13 F 1 G 3 1747 L552 processor 5 12 5 13 F 1 G 3 1747 L553 processor 5 12 5 13 F 1 G 3 1747 M1 EEPROM 2 22 1747 M12 Flash EPROM 2 23 1747 M2 EEPROM 2 22 1747 M5 adapter socket 2 22 1747 NET DNI G 5 1747 PCMK 1 2 1747 PIC 1 2 F 3 G 5 1747 PKTX 1 2 1747 SCNR D 6 F 3 G 5 1747 SDN D 3 G 5 1747 UIC 1 2 1 10 F 3 description 2 20 A 5 example network A 5 function on DH 485 A 3 Index Installation Instructions publication A 3 1761 NET DNI D 4 1770 KF3 module A 3 1784 KTX card C 6 1784 KTXD card C 6 1784 PCMK card A 3 C 6 1785 KA5 module on the data highway plus network C 6 5 01 processors general sp
95. Connect Ground Bus to Grounding Electrode System 3 8 Special Grounding Considerations for DC Applications MIS UA OP pon tase pina an 4 oboe A anne ERRA 3 10 Modification to the SLC 500 Series A Chassis 3 10 Determining the Date of the SLC 500 Series A Chassis 3 11 Master Control Relay n o anana aaa 3 12 Emergency Stop Switches nnana aaa 3 13 Power Considerations oonan 00000 3 13 Common Power Source 2 00000 a 3 13 Isolation Transformer 5 os eta oe Bo ee Ss 3 14 Grounded ac Power Distribution System with Master Control Relay inset ote any au ee a ae 3 14 Power Supply Required Input Voltage Characteristics 3 15 Loss of Power Source 4 yd amp panes tee Es oe PRs 3 15 Input States on Power DOW wee a x hw hae ad 3 15 Power Supply Undervoltage Operation 3 16 SLC 500 Operation with 24V dc User Power Overcurrent Condition n was dole ede bheees 3 16 Safety Considerations n on S 45 Re Ras Bed ha DES EOS 3 17 Disconnecting Main Power 00005 3 17 Safety GM CUNIS a die POF ne Pen he pe BS Poet ae Pe ES 3 17 Power Distribution ence oa ae a eo eee eM 3 17 Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit 3 18 Preventive Maintenance 0 00000 ee eee 3 18 Chapter 4 Mounting Modular Hardware Style Units 4 1 4 Slot Modular Chassis 4 07 e lt acie ks een 2oexe Feo 4 1 7 Slot Modular Chassis o o aaaea 4 2 10 Slot Modular Cha
96. ControlFlash Upgrade Installation Instructions In depth information on the SLC Instruction Set SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual 1747 RMO001 A description on how to install and use your Fixed SLC 500 Installation amp Operation Manual for Fixed 1747 6 21 programmable controller Hardware Style Programmable Controllers A description on how to install and connect an AIC This manual Advanced Interface Converter AIC User 1761 6 4 also contains information on network wiring Manual Information on how to install configure and commission a DNI DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 6 5 Information on using the 1761 NET ENI Ethernet Interface MicroLogix Ethernet Interface User 1761 UM006 Manual Information on DF1 open protocol DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference 1770 6 5 16 Manual Information on reducing electrical noise System Design for Control of Electrical GMC RM001 Noise In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable Controller 1770 4 1 programmable controllers Grounding and Wiring Guidelines A description of important differences between solid state Application Considerations for Solid State SGI 1 1 programmable controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices Controls An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA A glossary
97. E of the NFPA 3 1 ASCII communication B 10 B BASIC programming language B 3 batteries lithium Code of Federal Regulations 49 CFR 173 22a 9 2 DOT E7052 provision 9 2 shipping when depleted 9 2 storing and handling 9 1 transportation 9 2 battery installation SLC 5 01 or SLC 5 02 processors 9 3 SLC 5 03 and higher processors 9 4 Belden 9463 C 4 Belden 9842 on the DH 485 network A 13 wire terminal connections A 15 bit Glossary 1 block diagrams Glossary 1 Boolean operators Glossary 2 BOOTP configuring SLC 5 05 E 6 E 9 using the Rockwell Utility E 8 branch Glossary 2 C cable routes planning A 10 cables 1746 C7 6 12 1746 C9 6 12 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Belden 9463 C 4 Belden 9842 A 14 certification power supplies 2 14 processors 2 11 channel 0 pinout B 2 chassis 13 slot modular mounting dimensions 4 2 date shown on 3 11 installation 1 3 6 3 chassis interconnect cables installation of 6 12 CIP definition Glossary 2 clock real time SLC 5 03 processor 5 6 SLC 5 04 processors 5 9 SLC 5 05 processors 5 12 Common Power Source 3 13 common techniques used in this manual P 3 communication protocols ASCII B 10 data highway plus C 1 DF1 full duplex B 4 DF1 half duplex B 5 DH 485 B 2 C 2 Ethernet E 1 communication scan Glossary 2 contact protection diodes 2 29 RC network 2 29 surge suppressor 2 29 varistor 2 29 contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance 10 1 Control Network
98. F1 Radio Modem protocol IMPORTANT There are some radio modem network configurations that will not work with the DF1 Radio Modem driver See DF1 Radio Modem System Limitations on page B 9 In these configurations continue to use DF1 Half Duplex protocol Like DF1 Full Duplex protocol DF1 Radio Modem allows any node to initiate to any other node at any time Gf the radio modem network supports full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance Like DF1 Half Duplex protocol a node ignores any packets received that have a destination address other than its own with the exception of broadcast packets and passthru packets Unlike either DF1 Full Duplex or DF1 Half Duplex protocols DF1 Radio Modem protocol does not include ACKs NAKs ENQs or poll packets Data integrity is ensured by the CRC checksum Using the DF1 Radio Modem The DF1 Radio Modem driver can be configured as the system mode driver for channel 0 using RSLogix 500 version 5 50 or higher Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 8 RS 232 Communication Interface Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The channel 0 configuration appears as follows Channel Configuration Ea Chan 0 User Driver DF1 Radio Modem X Node Address fi decimal Baud 19200 Parity NONE X Stop Bits 1 X Protocol Control Control Line No Handshaking 7 Error Detection CRC General Chan 1 System
99. KE to bridge between DH and DF1 plex master slave network network using 1747 PIC If using a 1761 NET AIC for isolation connect directly to DH 485 network with 1747 CP3 serial The 1785 KA5 and 1785 KE modules require use of a 1771 series chassis and power supply Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 10 Selecting Your Hardware Components SLC 500 System Test General Specifications The table below lists SLC 500 system test specifications Description Specification Industry Standard Temperature Operating 0 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F Not Applicable Storage 40 C to 85 C 40 F to 185 F Not Applicable Humidity 5 to 95 without condensation Not Applicable Vibration Operating 2 5G at 5 to 2000 Hz Not Applicable Non operating 5Gs at 5 to 2000 Hz Not Applicable Shock Operating all modules except relay contact Not Applicable 30 0Gs 3 pulses 11 ms Operating relay contact modules OW OX 10 combo 10 0Gs 3 pulses 11 ms Not Applicable Non operating 50 0Gs 3 pulses 11 ms Not Applicable Free Fall drop test Portable 2 268 kg 5 Ibs or less at 0 762 m 30 in six drops Not Applicable Portable 2 268 kg 5 Ibs or more at 0 1016 m 4 in three flat drops Not Applicable Electromagnetic Compatibility Showering Arc 1 5 KV NEMA ICS 2 230 NEMA ICS 3 304 Surge Withstand Capability 3 KV IEEE Std 472 1974 ANS C37 90 90A 1974 Elect
100. LED Off or Flashing RS232 DF1 Check the following communication parameters of programmer Statusothun Rice parameters are set and channel configuration DH 485 DH or up impropenty i baud rate programmer and processor baud rates must ENET or Batt LEDs does not matter match N DF1 node addresses default is 1 for half duplex and 9 for full duplex programmer and processor addresses must be different Se error checking gt number of data bits s Hardware problem Check cable connections 2 Check cable pinouts Also see Appendix B for RS 232 pinouts e Power LED On A fatal error has Excessive noise or 1 Cycle power to obtain flashing FLT LED and default e FLTLED On occurred a faulty processor program e Status of all other 2 Examine the error code following the power cycle Take LEDs does not appropriate action matter ow Reload the program gt Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 18 Troubleshooting Identifying Processor Errors while Downloading an Operating System The download process of the operating system by the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors takes up to 2 5 minutes While the download is in progress the RUN and FLT LEDs remain off The other four LEDs RS232 DH485 DH on the SLC 5 04 and ENET on the SLC 5 05 FORCE and BATT tu
101. M011E EN P February 2004 4 6 Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC DeviceNet Interface 1761 NET DNI Ethernet Interface 1761 NET ENI 52 07 mm 2 05 in 118 mm 4 64 i 107 mm 4 20 in 6 6mm 0 26 in Oo Allow 15 mm 0 6 n gt clearance for DIN rail latch movement during installation and removal Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 27 7 mm 1 09 in 71 4 mm 2 81 in Chapter 5 Identifying the Components of Your Processor This chapter covers the following e SLC 5 01 hardware features e SLC 5 02 hardware features e SLC 5 03 hardware features e SLC 5 04 hardware features e SLC 5 05 hardware features e keyswitch for the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors SLC 5 01 Processor The SLC 5 01 processor provides Hardware Features e two choices of program memory size 1K or 4K instructions e control of up to 3840 input and output points e powerful ladder logic programming instruction set e subroutines e a DH 485 communication channel peer to peer communication response to message commands only e capacitor backup for the 1747 L511 battery backup for the 1747 L514 e program using your programming software e UL listed to US and Canadian Safety Standards CE compliant C Tick marked The figure on page 5 2 shows the hardware components of the SLC 5 01 pr
102. N P February 2004 DCE 9 Pinout Signal is Equivalent DCE 25 Pin Description Pinout 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect Input 8 2 RXD Received Data Input 3 3 TXD Transmitted Data Output 2 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 20 5 COM Common Return Signal Ground Shared 7 6 DSR Data Set Ready Input 6 7 RTS Request to Send Output 4 8 CTS Clear to Send Input 5 9 RI Ring Indicator Input 22 IMPORTANT DCE signal names are viewed from a DTE perspective For example TXD is a DTE output and also a DCE input Pin Assignments for Wiring Connectors Use the following pin assignments to wire the connectors of Allen Bradley control devices with modems and peripheral devices that support RS 232 communication See the table below to find the wiring diagram that you need To Connect this To this Device Remarks See this Device Page Personal Computer Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled B 13 Peripheral DTE Hardware Handshaking Disabled B 13 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled B 14 Aea Peripheral DTE Hardware Handshaking Disabled B 14 Personal Computer Using a 1747 CP3 Cable B 15 1747 KE Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled B 15 Peripheral DTE Hardware Handshaking Disabled B 15 1746 BAS Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled B 16 Peripheral DTE Hardware Handshaking Disabled B 16 RS 232 Communication Interface B 13 To Connect this To this Device Remarks See t
103. NC lt RI 9 22 DTE DCE 1 Connect to the shield of the cable 2760 RB to a Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 25 Pin 2760 RB GND 1 1 1 GND 1 DCD 1 8 2 XD XD 3 2 3 RxD RXD 2 3 4 RTS RTS 7 4 5 cis sj CTS 8 5 6 DSR lt DSR 6 6 7 COM gt COM 5 7 20 DTR DTR 4 20 DTE RI 9 22 DCE 1 Connect the shield of the cable to the GND pin on one end only Leave the other end open 2760 RB to a SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Processor Personal Computer 1770 KF3 or PLC 5 Hardware Handshaking Disabled Peripheral Device 9 Pin 25 Pin 25 Pin 2760 RB GND amp 1 1 GND 3 DCD 1 8 ke 12 2 TXD RXD 3 2 3 RXD XD 2 3 2 4 RTS DTR 7 4 Lt 5 CTS COM 8 5 2 6 DSR DSR 6 6 lt 7 CoM e RTS 5 7 2 20 DTR CTS 4 20 lt DTE DTE 1 You can also use cable 1747 CP3 2 Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port 3 Connect the shield of the cable to the GND pin on one end only Leave the other end open Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 18 RS 232 Communication Interface PLC 5 Channel 0 to a Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled 25 Pin PLC 5 CH 8 DCD 3 RXD 2 XD 20 DTR COM DSR
104. Neut i Da X J 5 el a Ghaseis Q Chassis Ground Ground A jumper wire is recommended O O between the DC NEUT and Chassis Earth Ground Ground of the external power source Safety Ground Earth Ground 7 7 Modification to the SLC 500 Series A Chassis SLC 500 chassis 1746 A4 A7 A10 and A13 manufactured before November 1992 have a resistor between the logic ground and chassis ground This resistor could be damaged if the wiring recommendation described within the attention box on the previous page is not followed See the figure below for the location of the resistor SLC 500 chassis 1746 A4 A7 A10 and A13 with a manufacture date of November 1992 or later do not have this resistor Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 System Installation Recommendations SLC Chassis 1746 P3 3 11 0000 Not Used Not Used 24V dc DC Neut Chassis Ground Functional Ground O Safety Ground A Functional Ground Determining the Date of the SLC 500 Series A Chassis The date of the chassis is found within the serial number imprinted on the chassis nameplate located on the right side of the chassis See the figure below eUD Gio CE MADE IN U S A 0 la UY RACK CAT SER 1746 A7 A SERIAL NO ii A7 1195A1357 Right Side Month Year Publication
105. OLLER Shield Belden 9463 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 C 6 Setting Up the DH Network Typical DH Network Configuration The following figure illustrates a possible configuration for the SLC 5 04 processor on a DH network You can also use an SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 05 processor in place of the SLC 5 04 on the DH network if the 1785 KA5 card is used with a PLC 5 PC with 1784 KTX 1784 KTXD 1784 PKTX or 1784 PKTXD m 0508 PLC 5 15 DH Network PLC 5 15 with a 1785 KA5 D B The PLC 5 and i 1785 KA5 are SLC5 04 Modular 1747 NET AIC Bay cheer L Controller Interface together f Converter o 1747 AIC 1747 AIC a
106. Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a word logic A general term for digital circuits or programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Manual Typically an acoustically coupled type of modem The connection is established by a person on each end of the phone line They then insert the handsets into an acoustic coupler to complete the connection Master Control Relay MCR A hard wired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selected methods of operation Example run test or program Maximum Watts The maximum amount of heat that the module generates with field power present Minimum Load Current The lowest amount of current the output is designed to operate at Operating at or below this value is not reliable Glossary 9 Minimum Watts The amount of heat dissipation that can occur when there is no field power present Multi master network A network in which more than one node has the ability to initiate communications and initialize the link MO M1 File Transfer A M1 M0 file transfer is a method of moving large amounts of data between a SLC 500 process
107. P16 0 250 1746 0W4 0 045 0 045 1746 0W8 0 085 0 090 1746 0W16 0 170 0 180 1746 0X8 0 085 0 090 Digital Combination 1746 104 0 030 0 025 Modules 1746 108 0 060 0 045 1746 1012 0 090 0 070 1746 1012DC 0 080 0 060 Analog Input Modules 1746 N14 0 025 0 085 1746 NI8 0 200 0 100 1746 NI161 0 125 0 075 1746 NI16V 0 125 0 075 Analog Output Modules 1746 NO4I 0 055 0 195 1746 NO4V 0 055 0 145 1746 NO8I 0 120 0 2502 o8 I 1746 NO8V 0 120 0 1602 oe Analog Combination 1746 F1041 0 055 0 150 I Modules 1746 FI04V 0 055 0 120 1746 N104I 0 055 0 145 1746 NI04V 0 055 0 115 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Power Supply Worksheet F 3 Hardware Component Catalog Numbers Maximum Current A at 5V dc at 24V dc Specialty Modules 1746 BAS T 0 150 0 040 1746 BLM 1 000 1746 BTM 0 110 0 085 1746 HSCE 0 320 1746 HSCE2 0 250 1746 HSRV 0 300 1746 HSTP1 0 300 1746 INT4 0 110 1 085 1746 NR4 0 050 0 050 1746 NR8 0 100 0 170 1746 NT4 0 060 0 040 1746 NT8 0 120 0 070 1746 0S 1 000 0 200 1746 QV 0 215 Communication Modules 1747 ACN15 0 900 1747 ACNR15 0 900 1747 ASB 0 375 1747 BSN 0 800 0 1747 DCM 0 360 1747 KE 0 150 0 04014 1747 KFC15 0 640 0 1747 SCNR 0 900 1747 SDN 0 500 1747 SN 0 600 Peripheral Devices 1747 AIC 0 0 085 1747 DTAM 0 5 1747 PIC 0 5 1747 PSD NA NA 11747 UIC 0 0 1761 NET AIC 0 0
108. SI X3 28 1976 specification subcategories D1 data transparency and F1 two way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 4 Glossary Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your devices Direct Connect type of modem that is connected to a dedicated leased phone line and is active at all times DH Data Highway Plus implements peer to peer communication with a token passing scheme to rotate link mastership among the nodes connected to that link Data Highway Plus has the capability for online programming and is optimized for networks with fewer nodes Data Highway Plus supports up to 64 nodes DH 485 Network The DH 485 network is a collection of devices connected to the communication cable allowing information exchange A communication network based on the EIA Standard for RS 485 using an Allen Bradley proprietary protocol Discrete Input and Output DIO The discrete input and output is the transfer of one to 32 words between a SLC 500 processor and a scanner All 32 words of input data and all 32 words of output data are updated on each SLC program scan download The transfer of program or data files to a device DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTE Controlled Answer Type of modem that is unattended and
109. SLC 500 programmable controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual describes the procedures you use to install wire and troubleshoot your controller This manual e explains how to install and wire your controllers e gives you an overview of the SLC 500 programmable controller system Refer to publication 1747 RM001 SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual for the SLC 500 instruction set and for application examples to show the instruction set in use Refer to your programming software user documentation for more information on programming your SLC 500 programmable controller Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 Preface Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation products To obtain a copy contact your local Rockwell Automation office or distributor For Read this Document Document Number An overview of the SLC 500 family of products SLC 500 System Overview 1747 S0001 Details on the latest operating system upgrade to the SLC 5 03 and SLC 5 03 and SLC 5 04 Processors 1747 IN007 SLC 5 04 Processors Firmware Operating System Upgrade Installation Instructions Information on SLC 5 05 ControlFlash upgrade SLC5 05 Processor Firmware Operating 1747 IN019 System
110. Slave for SCADA type point to multipoint communication DH 485 Use a 1761 NET AIC with a 1747 CP3 cable to connect to the DH 485 network ASCII I O for connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers serial printers and weigh scales Channel to channel passthru Ethernet to DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master DF1 Radio Modem or DH 485 remote I O and DeviceNet passthru built in real time clock calendar 1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt STD 0 50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt DID advanced math features trigonometric PID exponential floating point and the compute instruction indirect addressing logical ASCII addressing in PLC 5 type messages flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS through the Ethernet port optional flash EPROM memory module available keyswitch RUN REMote PROGram clear faults battery backed RAM additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters multi point list UL listed to US and Canadian Safety Standards CE compliant C Tick marked Identifying the Components of Your Processor 5 13 Battery provides back up power for the CMOS RAM The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the SLC 5 05 processors 1747 L551 1747 L552 and 1747 L553 2
111. TD RD not used by 10BASE T not used by 10BASE T RD not used by 10BASE T not used by 10BASE T co N OD oy A Ww N When to use straight through and cross over pin out e SLC 5 05 Ethernet port to 10Base T Ethernet hub cables utilize a straight through pin out 1 1 2 2 3 3 6 6 e Direct point to point 10Base T cables connecting the SLC 5 05 Ethernet port directly to another SLC 5 05 Ethernet port or a computer 10Base T port require a cross over pin out 1 3 2 6 3 1 6 2 Cables Shielded and non shielded twisted pair 10Base T cables with RJ45 connectors are supported The maximum cable length between an SLC 5 05 Ethernet port and a 10Base T port on an Ethernet hub without repeaters or fiber is 100 meters 323 feet However in an industrial application cable length should be kept to a minimum TCP IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages On top of TCP the Client Server Protocol is required to establish sessions and to send the MSG commands Connections can be initiated by either a client program INTERCHANGE or RSLinx application or a processor The client program or processor must first establish a connection to the SLC 5 05 to enable the SLC 5 05 to receive solicited messages from a client program or another processor Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 5 Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the SLC 5 05 In order to send an outgoing me
112. TTENTION Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash collection Explosion or violent rupture is possible Batteries should be collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short circuiting compacting or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal For disposal batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance with transportation regulations to a proper disposal site The U S Department of Transportation authorizes shipment of Lithium batteries for disposal by motor vehicle only in regulation 173 1015 of CFR 49 effective January 5 1983 For additional information contact U S Department of Transportation Research and Special Programs Administration 400 Seventh Street S W Washington D C 20590 Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no regulations specific to lithium batteries the material contained may be considered toxic reactive or corrosive The person disposing of the material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so State and local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials For a lithium battery product safety data sheet contact the manufacturer Sanyo Energy Corporation or Tadarand Electronics 600 Supreme Drive 2 Seaview Blvd Bensenville Il 60106 Port Washington NY 11050 USA USA Back up power for RAM is provided by a replaceable battery The lithium battery provides back up for approximately five years for
113. Terminal Wiring e 2 wires per terminal maximum e 14 AWG 2mm2 maximum e maximum torque 0 9 Nm 8 in lbs de amp C C Co Cd Terminal Block Screw maximum torque 0 6 Nm 5 3 in lbs rca Gale Tie Wire ae Wires Leading to Input and Output Devices Wiring Your 1 0 Module Terminals on the modules have self lifting pressure plates that accept two 2 mm 14 AWG wires Series B 12 point and 16 point and analog modules are equipped with removable terminal blocks for ease of wiring The plug for the removable terminals is also color coded red AC blue DO orange relay or green specialty LED indicators on the front of each module display the status of each I O point The LED indicators illuminate when the proper signal to an input terminal is applied or when the processor commands an output to be energized Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Octal Label Kit Installation Wiring Your I O Modules 7 7 To locate the I O module wiring diagrams contact your Rockwell Automation sales office for the latest product data entitled Discrete Input and Output Modules Publication Number 1746 2 35 Or locate the installation instruction sheet that was sent with your I O module It also includes I O wiring diag
114. W8 0 138 2 590 3 70 1746 0W16 0 033 5 170 5 70 1746 0X8 0 825 2 590 8 60 Digital Combination Modules 1746 104 0 270 per input pt 0 750 1 60 0 133 per output pt 1746 108 0 270 per input pt 1 380 3 00 0 133 per output pt 1746 1012 0 270 per input pt 2 130 4 60 0 133 per output pt 1746 1012DC 0 200 per input pt 1 840 3 90 0 133 per output pt Analog Input Modules 1746 NI4 NA 2 170 2 20 1746 NI8 NA 3 4 3 4 1746 NI16l NA 2 43 2 43 1746 NI16V NA 3 760 3 80 Analog Output Modules 1746 N04I NA 4 960 5 00 1746 NO4V NA 3 780 3 80 1746 NO8I NA 2 44 6 6 1746 NO8V NA 1 98 4 44 Analog Combination Modules 1746 F1041 NA 3 760 3 800 1746 Fl04V NA 3 040 3 100 1746 NI041 NA 3 760 3 80 1746 NI04V NA 3 040 3 10 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System G 5 Hardware Catalog Numbers Watts per Poit Minimum Watts Total Watts _ Component Specialty Modules 1746 BAS NA 3 750 3 800 1746 BLM NA 5 00 5 00 1746 BTM NA 2 59 2 59 1746 HSCE NA 1 600 1 600 1746 HSCE2 NA 1 25 1 25 1746 HSRV NA 1 50 1 50 1746 HSTP1 NA 1 50 1 50 1746 INT4 NA 1 26 1 26 1746 NR4 NA 1 500 1 500 1746 NR8 NA 1 82 1 82 1746 NT4 NA 0 800 0 800 1746 NT8 NA 2 28 2 28 1746 0S NA 9 80 9 80 1746 0QV NA 1 075 1 075 Communication Modules 1747 ACN15 NA 45 45 1747 ACNR15 NA 45 45 1747 ASB NA 1 875 1 875 1747
115. WG Safety Ground 2 mm 14 AWG Safety Ground 2 mm 14 AWG Nearest Ground Bus D Earth Ground 7 8 37 mm 8 AWG wire 8 _ 8 gt Functional Ground 5 26 mm 10 AWG 1 Keep safety ground connection to panel as short as possible Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 10 System Installation Recommendations Special Grounding Considerations for DC Applications using 1746 P3 Keep wire length as short as possible Matti ny voltage applied to the 1746 P3 DC NEUT terminal will be present at the SLC logic ground and the processor DH 485 port To prevent unwanted potentials across the logic ground of the controller and or damage to the SLC chassis the DC NEUTRAL of the external DC power source must be either isolated from the SLC chassis ground or connected to earth ground See the figure below Processor a SLC 500 Chassis i 1746 P3 External DC Power Source Door 7 val le a mae o5 Not Used x DH 485 Port Not Used as SLC Logic Ground 24 VDC e al S DC
116. a 914 4 mm 36 in cable used when linking modular hardware style 1746 C9 chassis from 152 4 mm 6 in up to 914 4 mm 36 in apart in an enclosure Chassis Interconnect Cable The 1746 C16 is a 1 27m 50 in cable used when linking modular hardware style chassis 1746 C16 from 0 914m 36 in up to 1 27m 50 in apart in an enclosure This is the longest chassis interconnect cable recommended by Allen Bradley 32 Point Mating Connector This connector is used for terminating a user made cable It is compatible with the 1746 N3 Catalog Number 1492 IFM40x DIN RAIL mountable terminal block interface module used with 32 point I O modules Replacement Processor to Peripheral Programming Communication Cable This 1 8 m 6 ft cable is used to connect 1747 C10 the interface converter to the SLC 500 controller when using personal computer interface software This cable is also used to connect the Hand Held Terminal to the SLC 500 controller and to connect the Data Table Access Module to the SLC 500 controller Replacement Processor to Isolated Link Coupler Cable This 304 8 mm 12 in cable is used to connect the SLC 500 1747 C11 controller to the isolated link coupler Communication Module to Isolated Link Coupler Cable This 914 4 mm 36 in cable is used to connect communication 1747 C13 modules i e 1746 BAS 1747 KE and 1747 UIC to the isolated link coupler The isolated link coupler must be powered by an external power supply or co
117. actLogix 1747 CP3 1756 CP3 FlexLogix 1747 CP3 1756 CP3 ControlLogix 1747 CP3 1756 CP3 SLC 500 Fixed Controller O DO O D g PC with a BS USB Port E PanelView 300 5 Z5 m and higher ll 3 RRR RRR ZEEE EES p all 1747 UIC OTO Tey 1747 AC c0 rits ae t SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 Channel 1 Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 7 Connect the following DH 485 equipment to the RS 485 port using cable SLC 500 Fixed Controller SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 Channel 1 1747 AlC Isolated Link Coupler PanelView 300 and higher with DH 485 port 1747 C13 1747 C10 Below is an example of a DH 485 network Example System Configuration Personal Computer Personal Computer ey 4 SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 ee SLC 500 20 Point Fixed L EEES HEPES BEES ope Controller with 2 Slot
118. adley products support half duplex master protocol They include the Enhanced PLC 5 processors and SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors WINtelligent Linx and RSLinx 2 0 or higher from Rockwell Software Inc also support half duplex master protocol DF1 Half duplex supports up to 255 slave devices addresses 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts The SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 support broadcast reception SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors with operating system FRN C 6 can also initiate broadcast write commands via the MSG instruction for all Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 6 RS 232 Communication Interface channel 0 system mode drivers and for channel 1 DH 485 on the SLC 5 03 processor Broadcast is not supported for read commands or any remote messages Broadcast is also not supported by the SLC 5 04 channel 1 DH network or the SLC 5 05 channel 1 Ethernet network TIP Either half duplex or full duplex modem types can be used for the master but half duplex modems must be used for the slaves assuming there is more than one on a multi drop network Personal Computer Running RSLinx with DF1 Half Duplex Protocol Master RS 232 DF1 Protocol Modem eee Modem 7 __ Modem nooo ooo oono Modular Controller with Modular
119. ady The Communications Active Bit S 1 7 is set in the System Status file and the processor Color green is actively communicating on the DH 485 network Flashing The processor is trying to establish communications but there are no other active nodes on the DH 485 network Off A fatal error is present no communications RS 232 On flashing The SLC 5 03 is transmitting on the network Color green DF1 ASCII Mode Off The SLC 5 03 processor is not transmitting on the network DF1 ASCII Mode On steady The Communications Active Bit S 33 4 is set in the System Status file and the processor DH 485 Mode is actively communicating on the DH 485 network Flashing The processor is trying to establish communications but there are no other active nodes DH 485 Mode on the DH 485 network Off A fatal error is present no communications DH 485 Mode 1 If the LEDs on the SLC 5 03 turn on in a predefined sequ 2 See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 ence the SLC 5 03 is in the process of downloading a new operating system Identifying the Components of Your Processor 5 9 SLC 5 04 Processor Hardware Features The SLC 5 04 processors offer the following e program memory sizes of 16K 32K or 64K e high speed performance 0 90 ms K typical control of up to 4096 input and output points online programming includes runtime editing built in DH channel support
120. ages controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries after errors are detected The SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors can communicate by means of the RS 232 communication port channel 0 Channel 0 supports DF1 Full Duplex protocol DF1 Half Duplex master and slave protocol DH485 protocol ASCII communications and DF1 Radio Modem protocol Refer to your programming software user manual for information on configuring the RS 232 communication port channel 0 The details of the DF1 protocols can be found in the DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual Publication Number 1770 6 5 16 Channel 0 provides a minimum of 500V dc isolation between the I O signals and the logic ground of the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors The channel is a 9 pin D shell The table below provides a description of each of the pins Pin Pin Name DCD Data Carrier Detect RXD Receive Data TXD Transmit Data DTR Data Terminal Ready COM Common Return Signal Ground DSR Data Set Ready RTS Request to Send CTS Clear to Send NC No Connection oO CO N Dm omy A wr N The D shell is the bottom port on the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors SLC 500 Devices that Support RS 232 Communication RS 232 Communication Interface B 3 The SLC 500 product line has three other modules aside from the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors that support th
121. al chips when drilling mounting ATTENTION holes for the SLC chassis Do not drill holes above an SLC chassis if a processor and I O modules are installed eee a J 2 Install the hardware for the top mounting tabs M4 or M5 10 or 12 phillips screw Pe and star washer or SEM screw TIP Scrape paint off the back panel for an electrical connection between the chassis and back panel Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 6 4 Installing Your Hardware Components 3 Slide the chassis over the installed hardware and tighten the screws ATTENTION If the chassis mounting tabs do not lay flat before the screws are tightened use additional washers as shims so the chassis will not warp when tightening the screws Warping the chassis could damage the backplane and cause poor connections 4 Leaving far left and far right tabs open for grounding install the remaining tab hardware for a four slot chassis leave both tabs open Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Installing Your Hardware Components 6 5 Installing Your Processor The processor always occupies the first slot of the first chassis You can only install one processor per system ATTENTION Never install remove or wire any module while power is applied Also do not expose processor modules to surfaces or other areas that may typically hold an electrostatic charge Electrostatic discharge ca
122. analog interface to odules motion control from communication to high speed counting For a complete listing of specialty I O modules and their specifications contact your Allen Bradley sales office for the latest system overview entitled SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I O Modules publication 1747 SO001 or for a related technical data Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Selecting Power Supplies Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 13 To select a power supply you need the following documents e power supply worksheet See F one for each chassis e SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I O Modules publication 1747 SO001 or SLC 500 Modular Chassis and Power Supplies Technical Data publication number 1746 TD003 When configuring a modular system you must have a power supply for each chassis Careful system configuration will result in the best performance Excessive loading of the power supply outputs can cause a power supply shutdown or premature failure There are three different AC power supplies and four DC power supplies For AC power supplies the 120 240V selection is made by a jumper Place the jumper to match the input voltage Mer Ensure that the power supply jumper is in the correct position before supplying power to the SLC 500 system or personal injury or damage to the system may result SLC power supplies have an LED that illuminates when the power supply is functioning properly Page 2 14 l
123. and whether BOOTP is enabled Also included are the name server secondary name server and the default domain name parameters if configured E 1747 L552 TCP IP Configuration Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automa Il File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor TCPAP Configuration TP Address 131 200 50 92 Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Gateway Address 131 200 50 1 Name Server 131 200 78 12 Secondary Name Server 131 200 78 4 Default Domain Name mke ra rockwell com BOOTP Enable No Ethernet Address 00 00 BC 1D 09 9D Module Home Page Module Information TCP IP Configuration Diagnostic Information Memory Map D T Monitor User Provided Pages Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 14 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Diagnostic Information This section gives you access to the various diagnostic information screens that are available It is divided into two sections the Network Stack Statistics and Application Level Statistics The Network Stack Statistics detail information about the TCP IP stack while the Application Level Statistics are related to the Allen Bradley Client Server Protocol CSP and Control and Information Protocol CIP diagnostics The individual diagnostic screens automatically refresh using a time which is configurable by the user and def
124. apacity Not Applicable Processor memory and chassis power limit up to 4096 inputs and 4096 outputs Maximum 3 Chassis 30 Slots of 1 0 Chassis Slots Standard RAM Capacitor Lithium Battery 2 weeks 2 years Optional Lithium Battery 5 years Capacitor 30 minutes minimum Memory Back up EEPROM Flash EPROM Options LED Indicators Run Run Run Run Run CPU Fault CPU Fault CPU Fault CPU Fault CPU Fault Forced 0 Forced 0 Forced 0 Forced 0 Forced 0 Battery Low Battery Low Battery Low Battery Low Battery Low COMM RS 232 RS 232 RS 232 DH 485 DH Ethernet Power Supply 350 mA at 5V de 500 mA at 5V dc 1A at 5V de 1A at 5V de Foaling 105 mA at 24V de 175mAat 2AV 0 mA at 24V dc 0 mA at 24V de c Clock Calendar Not Applicable 54 sec month at 25 C 77 F 81 sec month at 60 C 140 F Accuracy Program Scan 20 milliseconds to 3 seconds dependent on power supply loading Hold up Time after Loss of Power Noise Immunity NEMA Standard ICS 2 230 Temperature Rating Operating 0 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F Storage 40 C to 85 C 40 F to 185 F Humidity 5 to 95 without condensation Shock operating 306 Vibrations Displacement 015 in peak to peak at 5 57 Hz Acceleration 2 5Gs at 57 2000 Hz Certification UL listed to US and Canadian Safety Standards Class 1 Groups A B C or D Division 2 CE compliant for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts 1 See Capacitor Memory Backu
125. ation Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 7 The table below summarizes the processor channel connections Processor Physical Communication Channel DH 485 RS 232 DH Ethernet SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 DH 485 protocol SLC 5 03 Channel 0 DH 485 DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave ASCII and DF1 Radio Modem protocols Channel 1 DH 485 protocol SLC 5 04 Channel 0 DH 485 DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave ASCII and DF1 Radio Modem T protocols Channel 1 DH protocol SLC 5 05 Channel 0 DH 485 DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave ASCII and DF1 Radio Modem protocols Channel 1 Ethernet TCP IP protocol 1 A 1761 NET AIC is required when connecting to a DH 485 network Protocol Options Ethernet TCP IP Protocol Standard Ethernet utilizing the TCP IP protocol is used as the backbone network in many office and industrial buildings Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps This network provides the same capabilities as DH or DH 485 networks plus e SNMP support for Ethernet network management e optional dynamic configuration of IP addresses using a BOOTP utility e SLC 5 05 Ethernet data rate up to 40 times faster than SLC 5 04 DH messaging e ability to message entire SLC 5 05 data files e much greater number of nodes on
126. ation ei gindo a oad nad ee ae a E 13 TCP IP Configuration Data Read Only E 13 Diagnostic Information n on aaa hoses OSes ks E 14 Data Table Memory Map 000 00005 E 15 Data Table Monitor Jud bh a eis dod 4 Fe E 16 User Provided Pages 452 agi ean Ul eke ee SE Ore we E 16 Appendix F Power Supply Loading 0 0 0 0 eee eae F 1 Bl nk Worksheet sesasi a ama he ee Rae tee wee at F 4 Appendix G Definition of Key Terms tas cyaieca a eae eRe es G 1 Calculating Module Heat Dissipation G 1 Calculated Watts vs Total Watts 0 04 G 2 Power Supply Loading Reference Table G 3 Power Supply Heat Dissipation Graphs G 6 Example Heat Dissipation Calculation G 7 Example Worksheet 14 432 yw teak ity we eae aby we hake G 8 Blank Worksheet pokri sranane raiu SEE AO ed G 9 Glossary Index Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 viii Table of Contents Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of this Manual Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning e who should use this manual e the purpose of this manual e related documentation e conventions used in this manual e Rockwell Automation support Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use
127. aults to 15 seconds E 1747 L552 Diagnostic Information Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Autom Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor Diagnostic Information Network Stack Statistics Application Level Statistics General Ethernet Counters Application Memory Statistics Ethernet Interface Statistics Dualport Message Statistics SONIC CSP Session Tables ICMP Statistics Encapsulation Protocol Session IP Statistics Table UDP Statistics Encapsulation Protocol Statistics TCP Statistics CIP Connection Statistics TCP Extended Statistics CIP Counters Network Memory Statistics Mobuf Statistics Module Home Page Module Information TCP IP Configuration Diagnostic Information Memory Map D T Monitor User Provided Pages f Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 15 Data Table Memory Map The Data Table Memory Map page displays a list of the data table files their type and size in elements for a connected SLC 5 05 as shown in the following example Z 1747 1552 Data Table Memory Map Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Auto Bfm E3 Eie Edt View Favoites Toos Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor Data Table Memory Map File Elements File Type 128 Output 128 Input 83 Status 1 Binary po 5 5 Timer 2 Counter 1 Control 199
128. bel for 1746 IA16 1746 RL40 for 1746 IB16 1746 RL41 for 1746 IG16 1746 RL42 for 1746 IM16 1746 RL43 for 1746 IN16 1746 RL44 for 1746 IV16 1746 RL45 for 1746 ITB16 1746 RL46 for 1746 ITV16 1746 RL47 for 1746 0A16 1746 RL50 for 1746 OB16 1746 RL51 for 1746 0G16 1746 RL52 for 1746 OV16 1746 RL53 for 1746 OW16 1746 RL54 for 1746 OBP16 1746 RL55 for 1746 OVP16 1746 RL56 for 1746 OAP12 1746 RL57 for 1746 IC16 1746 RL58 for 1746 IH16 1746 RL59 for 1746 IB32 1746 RL60 for 1746 IV32 1746 RL61 for 1746 0B32 and 1746 0B3Z2E 1746 RL70 for 1746 0V32 1746 RL71 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Replacement Parts 11 5 Description Catalog Number for 1746 OB16E 1746 RL72 Lithium Battery Assembly This is an optional part used for the SLC 500 Fixed and Modular Hardware Style processors 1747 BA and the Hand Held Terminal Refer to product documentation for proper storage and handling instructions For disposal information consult your nearest Rockwell Automation Sales Office Replacement Keys for the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors 1747 KY1 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 11 6 Replacement Parts Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 DH 485 Network Description Appendix A Setting Up the DH 485 Network The information in this appendix will help you plan install and operate the SLC 500 in a DH 485 network This chapter also contains
129. between the supply and the output terminal When the output is activated it sinks current from the field device Field Device Ra DC 0 Output Circuit DC Power Supply Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 7 4 Wiring Your I O Modules Preparing Your Wiring Layout Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Careful wire routing within the enclosure helps to cut down electrical noise between I O lines Follow these rules for routing your wires e Route incoming power to the controller by a separate path from wiring to I O devices Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular I M P a RTA NT Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit If wiring ducts are used allow for at least two inches between I O wiring ducts and the controller If the terminal strips are used for I O wiring allow for at least two inches between the terminal strips and the controller Limit the cable length for the TTL input module to 15 24 m 50 ft per point and 3 05 m 10 ft per point for the TTL output module Use low power DC I O wiring even though it is less tolerant to electrical noise ATTENTION Handle the TTL module by its ends not metallic surfaces Electrostatic discharges can damage the module Do not expose the TTL module to electrostatic charges Segregate I O wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristi
130. broadcasts a BOOTP request message containing its hardware address over the local network or subnet e The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the addresses in its look up table e The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with the IP address and other network information that corresponds to the hardware address it received With all hardware and IP addresses in one location you can easily change IP addresses in the BOOTP configuration file if your network needs change The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the BOOTP Enable parameter in the channel Configuration File When BOOTP Enable is cleared disabled the SLC 5 05 uses the existing channel configuration data IMPORTANT If BOOTP is disabled or no BOOTP server exists on the network you must use SLC 500 programming software to enter change the IP address for each processor Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 8 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Using the Rockwell BOOTP Utility The Rockwell BOOTP utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP software with a user friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 5000 installation CD It can also be downloaded from www ab com networks bootp index html web page The device must have BOOTP enabled factory default to use the utility To co
131. can A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with devices such as other controllers and operator interface devices takes place during this period Continuous Current Per Module The maximum current for each module The sum of the output current for each point should not exceed this value Continuous Current Per Point The maximum current each output is designed to continuously supply to a load Glossary 3 control program User logic the application that defines the controller s operation controller A device such as a programmable controller used to control output devices controller overhead A portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping purposes memory checks tests communications etc control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions counter A device that counts the occurrence of some event CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller CSP Client Server Protocol data table The part of processor memory that contains I O status and files where user data such as bit integer timers and counters is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DCHP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol used to assign dynamic IP addresses to devices residing on a network DF1 protocol A peer to peer link layer protocol that combines features of AN
132. can only change the processor mode by changing the keyswitch position To change the processor mode to Program toggle the keyswitch from REM or RUN to PROG When the keyswitch is left in the PROG position you cannot use a programmer operator interface device to change the processor mode Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 5 16 Identifying the Components of Your Processor Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 REM Position This position places the processor in the Remote mode either the REMote Run REMote Program or REMote Test mode You can change the processor mode by changing the keyswitch position or by changing the mode from a programmer operator interface device You can perform online program editing in this position To change the processor mode to REM toggle the keyswitch from RUN or PROG to REM When the keyswitch is in the REM position you can use a programmer operator interface device to change the processor mode Compliance to European Union Directives Chapter 6 Installing Your Hardware Components This chapter shows you how to install the following hardware components e your chassis e your processor e modules e your memory module e your power supply e your chassis interconnect cable This product is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives EMC Directive The analog modules are te
133. coming Power V ac NEUT Incomin de NEUT F cuassiscrounn Pe CHASSIS GROUND 1746 P4 PWR OUT 24V dc User Power a PWR our com User P lt PWR OUT 24V de ser Power PWR OUT COM OO 125V de 85 to 132V ac Hohl de NEUT i ower SENER CHASSIS GROUND 170 to 250V ac 1746 P6 1 85 t0 132 170 to 250V ac p a PWR OUT 24V de E nee PWR OUT COM Incoming Power P 48V d BI L2 NEUTRAL Incoming c Power D de NEUT CHASSIS GROUND CHASSIS GROUND 1746 P7 PRE BE n 4 ne E IMPORTANT Terminal screws on the 1746 P1 P2 P3 NOT USED P5 P6 and P7 should be tightened with a ie NOT USED maximum torque of 1 Nm 8 8 in lbs 12 24V de Terminal screws on the 1746 P4 should be Incoming de NEUT tightened with a max torque of 0 8 Nm Poer CHASSISGROUND 7 in lbs Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 1 8 Quick Start for Experienced Users 6 Install the processor Reference Chapter 2 Selecting Your Hardware If your processor has a battery the battery is an option for the Components SLC 5 01 1747 L511 processor make sure it is connected before installing your processor into the chassis This provides memory backup for your processor should the controller power supply fail Make sure sys
134. cond Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 BP 3A B 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Rockwell Automation Brihlstra amp e 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 351 6723 Fax 65 355 1733 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Supersedes Publication 1747 UM011D EN P April 2003 Copyright 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
135. cs together Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed into the enclosure by separate paths Refer to Allen Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines Publication Number 1770 4 1 ATTENTION If the controller is being installed within a potentially hazardous environment that is Class I Division 2 all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501 4 b Wiring Your I O Modules 7 5 Recommendations for The following are general recommendations for wiring I O devices Wiring 1 0 Devices ATTENTION Before you install and wire I O devices disconnect power from the controller and any other source to the I O devices e Use acceptable wire gauge The I O wiring terminals are designed to accept two wires per terminal maximum of the following size wire 2 Europe 2 mm cross section or smaller United States 14 AWG or smaller stranded wires e See diagram on page 7 6 for maximum torque values for wiring terminal screws and terminal block screws e Label wires Label wiring to I O devices power sources and ground Use tape shrink tubing or other dependable means for labeling purposes In addition to labeling use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics For example you may use blue for DC I O wiring and red for AC I O wiring e Secure wires Route the wires down and away from the module securin
136. ction set definition Glossary 7 interconnect cable installation 6 12 interface converter 1747 PIC 2 19 isolated link coupler installing A 13 on DH 485 network A 4 isolation transformers example calculation 2 25 selecting 2 25 J jumpers J1 6 7 J4 10 18 power supply 6 9 K keyswitch clearing faults for the SLC 5 03 and higher processors 10 9 keyswitch location SLC 5 03 processor 5 7 SLC 5 04 processors 5 10 SLC 5 05 processors 5 13 keyswitch positions for the SLC 5 03 and SLC 5 04 processors PROG 5 15 REM 5 16 RUN 5 15 L ladder logic Glossary 7 least significant bit LSB Glossary 7 LIFO Last In First Out Glossary 8 line voltage variations excessive 2 26 link coupler mounting dimensions 4 4 lithium batteries Code of Federal Regulations 49 CFR 173 22a 9 2 DOT E7052 provision 9 2 installing on SLC 5 01 or SLC 5 02 processors 9 3 installing on SLC 5 03 and higher processors 9 4 shipping when depleted 9 2 storing and handling 9 1 transportation 9 2 local 1 0 capacity processor specification 2 11 logic Glossary 8 low byte Glossary 8 machine motion preventing 8 2 maintenance preventive 3 18 manuals related P 2 master control relay MCR definition Glossary 8 using 3 12 Index 5 master devices DF1 half duplex protocol B 5 memory backup options processor specification 2 11 memory modules for SLC 5 01 and 5 02 processors 2 21 for SLC 5 03 and higher processors 2 22 installation 6 7 mne
137. cuit is damaged Check wiring Try other output circuit Replace module Off De energized Your program indicates that the output circuit is on or the output circuit will not turn on Programming problem Check for duplicate outputs and addresses using search function If using subroutines outputs are left in their last state when not executing subroutines Use the force function to force output on If this does not force the output on output circuit is damaged If the output does force on then check again for logic programming problem Output is forced off in program Check processor FORCED 1 0 or FORCE LED and remove forces Output circuit is damaged Use the force function to force the output on If this forces the output on then there is a logic programming problem If this does not force the output on the output circuit is damaged Try other output circuit Replace module Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Chapter 11 Replacement Parts This chapter provides a list of replacement parts and a list of replacement terminal blocks for your SLC 500 controller Replacement Cables and Connectors Description Catalog Number Chassis Interconnect Cable The 1746 C7 is a 152 4 mm 6 in ribbon cable used when linking modular hardware style 1746 C7 chassis up to 152 4 mm 6 in apart in an enclosure Chassis Interconnect Cable The 1746 C9 is
138. d might cause machine motion When you are certain that machine motion cannot occur with the controller energized you may begin by initializing the processor using the following steps 1 Energize the chassis power supply If power is supplied to the controller and the installation is correct the initial factory conditions for all processors will be Processor Name DEFAULT Mode Program Mode or S 1 0 to S 1 4 0 0001 or Fault Mode S 1 0 to S 1 4 0 0001 and S 1 13 1 Watchdog Values 100 ms S 3H 0000 1010 1 0 Slot Enables ALL ENABLED 11 1 through S 12 14 set to 1 Node Address 1 Channel 1 DH485 except SLC 5 04 and 5 05 S 15L 0000 0001 Baud Rate 19 2K baud Channel 1 DH485 except SLC 5 04 and 5 05 S 15H 0000 0100 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and Channel 0 DF1 Full Duplex SLC 5 05 only configuration No Handshaking 19 2K Baud CRC Error Check Duplicate Detect On No Parity SLC 5 04 only Channel 1 DH configuration 57 6K Baud Default Node Address 1 SLC 5 05 only Channel 1 Ethernet configuration 10 Mbps 1 Configuring with BOOTP enabled so that a BOOTP server on the network can automatically provide the SLC 5 05 with the configuration necessary o start communicating over Ethernet See Appendix E for more information Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 8 4 Starting Up Your Control System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 ATTENTION These ste
139. d SLC 5 05 Processors The SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors include a 3 position keyswitch on the front panel that lets you select one of three modes of operation RUN PROGram and REMote You can remove the key in each of the three positions ATTENTION Depending on the size of your user program the processor can take up to 2 5 seconds to change modes when you change the position of the keyswitch from RUN to PROG or to REM Do not use the keyswitch in place of a hardwired master control relay or an emergency stop switch The SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 processors do not have a IMPORTANT IMPORTANT keyswitch Therefore all modes must be changed via the communication channels RUN Position This position places the processor in the Run mode The processor scans executes the ladder program monitors input devices energizes output devices and acts on enabled I O forces You can only change the processor mode by changing the keyswitch position You cannot perform online program editing To change the processor mode to Run toggle the keyswitch from PROG or REM to RUN When the keyswitch is left in the RUN position you cannot use a programmer operator interface device to change the processor mode PROG Position This position places the processor in the Program mode The processor does not scan execute the ladder program and the controller outputs are de energized You can perform online program editing You
140. den 9463 Terminate the DH link on both ends by connecting a 1509 1 2W resistor between terminals 1 and 2 of the 3 pin connector when you are communicating at 57 6K baud with a PLC 5 processor or 115 2K baud with other SLC 5 04 processors Use an 82Q 1 2W resistor if you are communicating at 230 4K baud with other SLC 5 04 processors or Series E enhanced PLC 5 processor Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Setting Up the DH Network C 5 SLC 5 04 CPU RUN FLT BATT FORCE DH RS232 1 To chassis ground directly at one point only in the network RUN FORCE FLT DH Earth Ground tl 0 01 pF Termi Resis Minimizing Noise To minimize the affect of noise on the SLC 5 04 processor ground the cable shields to earth via 0 01uF capacitors as shown in the DH wiring example below Only directly ground the shield at one point on the network PROG BATT o B PROC M o FORCE RUN 9 COMM o o SLC 5 04 CPU BATT RS232 AU sae Belden 9463 fo RUN REM PROG Shield AB nating ene Terminating tor Ex Resistor Connector Connector Clear 1 e e Clear e 1 Shield i 5 i Shield AE ve PLC 5 20 Blue PROGRAMMABLE CONTR
141. e RS 232 communication interface They are the DH 485 Communication Interface 1770 KF3 the BASIC module 1746 BAS and the DH 485 RS 232C Interface 1747 KE All three of these modules can be used with either the SLC 5 01 or SLC 5 02 processor 1770 KF3 Module The 1770 KF3 module links host computers with the Allen Bradley DH 485 Data Highway The host computer communicates with the 1770 KF3 over an RS232 link using DF1 protocol Through the 1770 KF3 the host computer can communicate with the nodes on the DH 485 network For more information on the 1770 KF3 module see the DH 485 Communication Interface User Manual Catalog Number 1770 6 5 18 1747 KE Module The 1747 KE is a communication interface module that acts as a bridge between DH 485 networks and devices requiring DF1 protocol You can configure the DF1 port on the 1747 KE for RS 232 423 RS 422 or RS 485 devices Residing in an SLC 500 chassis the 1747 KE is ideally used as an interface module linking remote DH 485 networks via a modem to a central host For more information on the 1747 KE module see the DH 485 RS 232 Interface Module User Manual Catalog Number 1747 IN006 1746 BAS and 1746 BAS T Modules The 1746 BAS and 1746 BAS T modules which are programmed using the BASIC language have two configurable serial ports for interfacing to computers modems serial printers and other RS 232 compatible devices You can also use them for off loading complex math ro
142. e at least 101 6 mm 4 in of clearance at the side of the chassis to allow for proper bend radius of the cable 1746 C9 Cable SLC 500 1746 C7 Cable SLC 500 SLC 500 c D lt Recommended Spacing A 15 3 to 20 0 cm 6 to 8 in when using the 1746 C9 cable If you mount two 13 slot chassis above each other the distance cannot exceed 10 2 to 12 7 cm 4 to 5 in B Greater than 10 2 cm 4 in C Greater than 15 3 cm 6 in D 7 7 to 10 2 cm 3 to 4 in when using the 1746 C7 cable SLC 500 1746 C9 Cable SLC 500 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 6 System Installation Recommendations Preventing Excessive Heat Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 For most applications normal convection cooling will keep the SLC 500 controller components within the specified operating range of 0 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F Proper spacing of components within the enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation In some applications a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure In this case place bl
143. e capability for SLC processors to produce or consume scheduled I O to and from a ControlNet network Scheduled messaging allows the SLC processor program to control I O events in real time over ControlNet The module connects to a ControlNet network via the standard BNC connectors The 1747 KFC15 ControlNet Messaging Module The 1747 KFC15 module provides the capability for SLC 5 03 and higher processors to send or receive unscheduled ControlNet messages With unscheduled messages the SLC processor program can send peer to peer messages or be accessed and edited over the ControlNet network using RSLogix 500 The 1747 KFC15 connects to the ControlNet network via the standard BNC connectors and links to the SLC processor via a standard RS 232 cable Other programming interfaces can connect to the ControlNet network through the 1747 KFC15 module s network access port SLC 5 05 Processors and Ethernet Communication Appendix E Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network This appendix e describes SLC 5 05 processors and Ethernet communication e describes SLC 5 05 performance considerations e describes Ethernet network connections and media e explains how the SLC 5 05 establishes node connections e lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures e describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps The physical comm
144. e logic program is based on your electrical relay print diagrams It contains instructions that direct control of your application With the ladder logic program entered into the controller placing the controller in the Run mode initiates an operating cycle The controller s operating cycle consists of a series of operations performed sequentially and repeatedly unless altered by your ladder logic program 1 input scan the time required for the controller to scan and read all input data typically accomplished within a few milliseconds Overhead Operation Cycle 2 program scan the time required for the processor to execute the instruction in the program The program scan time varies depending on the instruction used and each instruction s status during the scan time Output Scan IMPORTANT Subroutine and interrupt instructions within your logic program may cause deviations in the way the operating cycle is sequenced 3 output scan the time required for the controller to scan and write all output data typically accomplished within a few milliseconds 4 service communications the part of the operating cycle in which communication takes place with other devices such as an HHT or a personal computer 5 housekeeping and overhead time spent on memory Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Selecting Modular Processors Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 5 SLC 500 modular pr
145. e modules and the RTB are color coded as follows Color Red Type of 1 0 Removable Terminal Block AC inputs outputs Blue DC inputs outputs Orange relay outputs Green specialty modules Replacement terminal blocks are available if they are lost or damaged See the replacement part list in Chapter 11 Removing the RTB Below are guidelines for removing the I O Removable Terminal Block ATTENTION Never install or remove I O modules or terminal blocks while the SLC chassis is powered 1 If the I O module is already installed in the chassis remove power to the SLC chassis 2 Unscrew the upper right and lower left terminal block release Screws 3 Grasp the RTB with your thumb and forefinger and pull straight out 4 Label the RTB with appropriate slot chassis and module identification a lerminal Block Release Screw Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 7 10 Wiring Your I O Modules Installing the RTB Below are guidelines for installing the RTB 1 Be sure the color of the RTB matches the color band on the module ATTENTION Inserting a wired RTB on an incorrect module can damage the module circuitry when power 1 is applied 2 Write the appropriate slot chassis and module type
146. e no motion will occur when any controller output is energized Place the controller in the Program mode 10 11 12 Starting Up Your Control System 8 7 Create an output test rung as shown below for each output module configured MOV SOURCE B3 XX DEST O0 XX Y Let XX represent slot number of the output currently selected Y represents output word identifier This rung moves a word of data from the bit file to the output file Save the output test program and current controller configuration Transfer the output test program to the processor Put the controller in the Run mode Monitor the data in data file B3 on the programming device display Enter B3 XX at address prompt to select the output to be tested XX represents the output slot number Enter 1 at data prompt for the address that corresponds to the bit in the output word Observe the output status LED and the output device The output status LED should turn on The output device should be energized unless you disconnected it to prevent machine motion Reset the data value back to zero for the selected address and both the output status LED and output device should de energize If the status LED and the output device correspond to data settings in steps 10 and 11 repeat steps 8 through 11 for each output If the status LEDs and output device states do not correspond to the data settings in steps 9 and
147. e number and Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 17 the number of user pages to be stored as shown in the following example Channel Configuration x x _ General Chan 1 System Chan 0 System Chan 0 User Driver Hardware Address ERIE Dumon Dijo J 0 E E Pie Pass Thru Routing fo Subnet Mask 0 G0 0 Table File GatewayAddess 0 0 0 0 ee i User Provided Web Pages efault Domain Name 5 Starting Data File Number 20 Primary Name Serve f 0 0 0 0 Number of Pages 2 Secondary Name Server 0 o 60 0 rote ia Protocol Control M Boatp Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 1m5 f15000 Msg Reply Timeout x 1m8 2o00 Inactivity Timeout x Min 30 Contact SSL aw Location i es RSLogix 500 version 6 0 or later also allows you to import an HTML file from your PC to specified ASCII files in the SLC 5 05 processor See page E 20 for details HTML Pages Referencing Other Pages Servers following are some basic considerations when referencing other pages or servers e reference User Specified Pages in the SLC 5 05 by using the names user1 btml through user16 html e to reference a page on the same processor specify a URL such as user2 html e to reference a page on another processor specify a URL such as Attp Www xxx yyy zzz user2 himl where www XxXxX yVy ZZZ is the IP address of the processor e you can reference other WWW servers and display images from other s
148. e processor to the initial factory conditions the communication configurations are returned to their default settings and the user program is cleared 1 Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply 2 Remove the processor from the chassis 3 Disconnect the battery by removing the battery connector from its socket 4 Locate the VBB and GND connections on the right side of the motherboard 5 Place a small bladed screwdriver across the VBB and GND connections and hold for 60 seconds This returns the processor to the initial factory conditions SLC 5 03 1747 L531 and 1747 L532 S Mother Board Keyswitch Ee Right Side View Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 1 12 Quick Start for Experienced Users SLC 5 04 1747 L541 1747 L542 and 1747 1543 SLC 5 05 1747 L551 1747 L552 and 1747 L553 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 co F L o2o9 m 9090 u 3338 m c i m 5 Mother Board V Right Side View a Mother Board Chapter 2 Selecting Your Hardware Components This chapter provides general information on what your SLC 500 controller can do an overview of the modular control system and special considerations for controller installations It also explains how to select chassis modular processors discrete I O modules specialty I O modules po
149. e supplied with the link coupler Network connections for peripheral devices such as the Personal Interface Converter 1747 PIC or Data Table Access Module 1747 DTAM E are provided by the standard Catalog Number 1747 C10 1 8 m 6 ft cable supplied with each of those devices If you need to connect a peripheral device that is between 1 8 m ft and 6 1 m 20 ft away use the 1747 C20 cable To protect connected devices the coupler provides 1500V dc isolation between the communications cable and the attached SLC 500 controller and peripheral devices PIC or DTAM Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 5 The isolated link coupler can also be used to provide connectivity between a peripheral device programming software and PIC or DTAM for distances greater than 1 8 m 6 ft up to a maximum of 1219 m 4000 ft Below is an example of a remote connection between a computer running your programming software and an SLC 500 processor Programming Software 1747 PIC PIC 1747 C10 1747 AlC 1747 AIC 8 sisme 8 E Ai F oooo 9900 S3 S88 888888 8 ha m m 1747 29 1747 C11 24V de Data Table Spoon Access Module 250 1747 DTAM E 1747 UIC USB to DH 485 The 1747 UIC allows you to connect DH 485 devices direc
150. eady The forces have been enabled Off No forces are present or enabled BATTERY LOW On steady The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level Color red or the battery is missing or not connected Off The battery is functional COMM On steady The SLC 5 02 is connected to an active DH485 Color red network Off The SLC 5 02 is not receiving data 1 See Chapter 10 or more information on LED status Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 5 6 Identifying the Components of Your Processor SLC 5 03 Processor Hardware Features Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The SLC 5 03 processor offers the following program memory size of 8K or 16K control of up to 4096 input and output points online programming includes runtime editing built in DH 485 channel built in RS 232 channel supporting DF1 Full Duplex for point to point communication remotely via a modem or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices Use a 1747 CP3 cable for direct connection DF1 Radio Modem for Radio Modem peer to peer communication DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave for SCADA type point to multipoint communication DH 485 Serves as a second DH 485 channel Use a 1761 NET AIC with a 1747 CP3 1761 CBL AC00 or 1761 CBL APOO cable to connect to the DH 485 network ASCII I O for connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers serial printers and we
151. ecifications 2 11 hardware features 5 1 6 5 LEDs 5 2 troubleshooting 10 3 5 02 processor general specifications 2 11 hardware features 5 3 installing 6 5 LEDs 5 5 troubleshooting 10 3 5 03 processors active modem control lines CTS Clear to Send B 10 DCD Data Carrier Detect B 10 DSR Data Set Ready B 10 DTR Data Terminal Ready B 10 RTS Request to Send B 10 general specifications 2 11 hardware features 5 6 installing 6 5 keyswitch 5 15 LEDs 5 8 returning processor to initial factory conditions 10 20 troubleshooting 10 9 5 04 processors active modem control lines CTS Clear to Send B 10 DCD Data Carrier Detect B 10 DSR Data Set Ready B 10 DTR Data Terminal Ready B 10 RTS Request to Send B 10 general specifications 2 11 hardware features 5 9 installing 6 5 keyswitch 5 15 LEDs 5 10 5 13 returning processor to initial factory conditions 10 20 troubleshooting 10 9 5 05 processors channel 0 RS 232 communication Ethernet communications E 1 general specifications 2 11 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 Index hardware features 5 12 5 13 installing 6 5 keyswitch 5 15 returning processor to initial factory conditions 10 20 troubleshooting 10 9 A address Glossary 1 AIC Advanced Interface Converter Glossary 1 mounting dimensions 4 6 ambient temperature rating processor specification 2 11 application Glossary 1 Article 70B of the NFPA 3 18 Article 70
152. ect equipment from high voltage transients that may be generated on your power distribution system ATTENTION A Your SLC 500 power supply can be damaged by voltage surges when switching inductive loads such as motors motor starters solenoids and relays To avoid damage to your SLC 500 power supply in these applications use an isolation transformer to isolate the power supply from harmful voltage surges Grounded ac Power Distribution System with Master Control Relay Disc Suppressor lt o omu EH L1 O O0 o L1 Incoming oco 2FU L2 lo Motor Enclosure AC 3FU Starters Wall L3 o O o 13 i gt Step down Back panel Transformer Ground Bus i i eoeee aes Grounded Conductor FUSE Grounding electrode Multiple E stop if Conductor to switches Start Bae Grounding electrode pee eae quipment System oTo Q Do O O faa PS Grounding EES O W J Conductors MCR Suppressor ee twh Controller GND a lt L1 Power Supply N or L2 ee Mor Suppressor User DC E ely L Actuator MCR on lo o O i Input ff Output Module Sensor Input Module Wiring Arm Wiring Arm Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 System Installation Recommendations 3 15 Power Supply Required Input Voltage Characteristics 1 The appl
153. eld wiring to the digital logic For outputs the time required to transmit the circuit status from digital logic to the output wiring sinking A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sinking device provides a direct path to ground Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 14 Glossary Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 sinking sourcing Describes a current signal flow relationship between field input and output devices in a control system and their power supply Sourcing I O modules supply or source current to sinking field devices Sinking I O modules receive or sink current from sourcing field devices sourcing A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sourcing device or circuit provides power status The condition of a circuit or system Strobe Message A strobe message is a multicast transfer of data sent by the scanner that solicits a response from each slave device The devices respond with their data Surge Current Per Point The maximum amplitude and duration pulse of current allowed for a given period of time and temperature Surge Suppressor A device used to absorb voltage transients created by energizing an inductive load to reduce electrical noise or to protect the output circuit For example an R C network MOV metal oxide varistor or diode terminal A point on an I O module that external devices such as a push button or pilot light are w
154. elines for additional installation requirements pertaining to this equipment System Installation Recommendations 3 3 Hazardous Location Considerations Products marked CL1 DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code lowest T number may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be non hazardous e Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be non hazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2 e All wiring must comply with N E C article 501 4 b Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 4 System Installation Recommendations Typical Installation The figure below consists of some components that make up a typical installa
155. ent Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for Class 1 CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class 1 Div 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity and EN50081 2 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radio Communications Act compliant with 3 Isolation is between input terminals and backplane 6 Equivalent fuses 250V 3A 7 See the Product Certification link at www ab com for 9 Equivalent fuse 125V 3A fuse Nagasawa ULCS 61M 1 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 4 CPU hold up time is for OV unless specified Hold up ti 2 Use time delay type overcurrent protection in all ungrounded conductors me is dependent on power supply loading use nagasawa ULCS 61ML 3 or BUSSMAN AGC 3 8 Equivalent fuse 250V 3A fuse SANO SOC SD4 or BUSSMAN AGC 3 L 5 or BUSSMAN AGC 5 5 Fuse sizes specified are for end devices only Fuse size may need to be reduced depending on the size of circuit wiring Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details The combination of all output power 5 volt backplane 24 volt backplane and 24 volt user source cannot exceed 7
156. er 1747 M13 Supports up to 64K of user memory backup X X X Series C Series C Series C 0S302 or higher 08401 or higher 0 501 or higher 1 Discontinued superseded by 1747 M13 To program a memory module refer to your programming software user manual or help resource The basic procedure is as follows 1 Set the Memory Module Configuration Bits S 1 10 to 1 12 in your Offline program file Refer to SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual publication number 1747 RM001 for details on the Memory Module Configuration Bits 2 Download your program file to your processor 3 Go online with the processor and burn the program to the EEPROM Memory Module per the instructions outlined in your programming software user manual or help resource Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 24 Selecting Your Hardware Components EEPROM Burning Options You can burn a program into an EEPROM memory module using a processor that is the same or different from the one used to run the program When burning EEPROMs keep the following conditions in mind The processor burning the EEPROM must be of the same type and have the same OS version or lower than the target processor The program size cannot exceed the processor memory size For instance an SLC 5 01 4K processor can burn an EEPROM for a SLC 5 01 1K processor as long as the program does not exceed 1K The I O and chassis configuration of the burning proc
157. er Serial Port 9 Pin DTE 1747 UIC RS 232 Port 1747 CP3 1746 1 0 1492 IFMxx Interface Modules 1492 CABLExx 1747 SN Remote 1 0 Scanner 1747 DCM Direct Communication Module 1747 ASB SLC Remote 1 0 Adapter Module SLC 5 04 Processors 1747 L541 542 and 543 Remote I O Network Belden 9463 1747 AlC Isolated Link Coupler 1770 KF3 DH 485 Communication Interface 1747 AlC Isolated Link Coupler Belden 9842 or 3106A 1747 UIC RJ 485 Port SLC 500 Processors DH 485 channel 1747 C13 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Replacement Parts 11 3 Replacement Terminal Blocks Description Catalog Number Replacement Terminal Block Blue Used with DC 1 0 modules Catalog Numbers 1746 1B16 IC16 IH16 IV16 1746 RT25B OBP8 OB16 OB16E OBP16 OVP16 OV16 IN16 IG16 OG16 Replacement Terminal Block Orange Used with relay output modules Catalog Numbers 1746 OW16 0X8 1746 RT25C ao Terminal Block Green Used with Specialty 1 0 modules Catalog Numbers 1746 HSCE 1012 NR4 1746 RT25G Replacement Terminal Block Red Used with AC 1 0 modules Catalog Numbers 1746 IA16 OA16 IM16 OAP12 1746 RT25R Replacement Terminal Block 2 position terminal block used with analog outputs Catalog Numbers 1746 NO4l 1746 RT26 NO4V E Terminal Block
158. erface B 11 Wiring Connectors for RS 232 Communication To connect Allen Bradley devices with other devices over RS 232 you must wire the cable connectors so that communication can occur through the cabling which provide the interface between devices Types of RS 232 Connectors The figures below show male connectors and their pinout locations for Allen Bradley devices NU AOA o cow SN WO BOSS Cc 9 Pin Connector Male DTE Pinout T O ONURA do Ea ee en 15 Pin Connector Male NUAR AOT NO O O Oo 25 Pin Connector Male Channel 0 is configured as DTE for all SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors The pinouts are the same as the 9 pin PC port DTE 9 Pinout Signal is Equivalent Equivalent ET DTE 15 Pinout DTE 25 Pinout Pin Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect Input 8 8 2 RXD Received Data Input 3 3 3 TXD Transmitted Data Output 2 2 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 11 20 5 COM Common Return Signal Shared 7 7 Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready Input 6 6 7 RTS Request to Send Output 4 4 8 CTS Clear to Send Input 5 5 9 NC No Connection Input 22 RI Ring Indicator Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 12 RS 232 Communication Interface DCE Pinout Devices such as a modem are DCE The pinouts on these terminals are wired to interface with DTE Publication 1747 UM011E E
159. eripheral Dev 2 Add the heat dissipation values together for your total chassis heat dissipation 2 Add the heat dissipation values together for your total chassis heat dissipation 2 Add the heat dissipation values together for your total chassis heat dissipation 3 Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis minimum watts for each device Chassis Number 1 Chassis Number 2 Chassis Number 3 oO r mh o a x e rs mh o N T le r mh o N Catalog No Catalog No Catalog No Watts Watts Watts ser Power ser Power ser Power s 5 Peripheral Dev eripheral Dev eripheral Dev he heat dissipation values her for your power supply ng 5 Use the power supply loading step 4 for each chassis and the graphs on page G 6 to determine power supply dissipation he heat dissipation values her for your power supply ng 5 Use the power supply loading step 4 for each chassis and the graphs on page G 6 to determine power supply dissipation he heat dissipation values her for your power supply ng 5 Use the power supply loading step 4 for each chassis and the graphs on page G 6 to determine power supply dissipation he chassis dissipation step 6 Add the chassis dissipation step the power supply dissipation 2 to the power supply dissipation 5 step 5 7 Add the values together from step 6 across to the right 6 Add the
160. es e device I O data e status information e configuration data Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 D 4 Control Networks A single scanner master can communicate with up to 63 nodes slaves on DeviceNet The SLC system supports multiple scanners if more devices are required to be controlled by a single SLC 500 processor o 1747 SDN Scanner SLC 5 02 or higher FF 1770 KFD 7 J PC with processor Fea RS 232 LO RSNetworx for ig abe gz DeviceNet x fb DeviceNet Network aon E a x a T Flex 1 0 RediSTATION aaa I rE DeviceNet N ae 1305 Drive meee se ies a Ze Poe The 1761 NET DNI DeviceNet Interface The DeviceNet Interface DND is an intelligent DeviceNet to DF1 protocol conversion device that allows existing DF1 devices to communicate on DeviceNet The DF1 device is able to exchange I O data with a master device and is able to initiate and receive DF1 encapsulated DeviceNet messages across DeviceNet The DNI provides a single DeviceNet connection point and a single RS 232 connection The DeviceNet port is isolated from the DNI digital logic and RS 232 port Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Control Networks D 5 The primary functions of the DNI are e to collect and receive i
161. essor does not have to match the I O configuration of the program being burned You do not have to enter the Run mode before burning an EEPROM If the run mode is entered and the chassis configuration does not match a major fault will occur If you burn an EEPROM while in the fault mode the fault will also be saved in the EEPROM The following table summarizes the above conditions as to the type of processor you can use to burn EEPROMs for other processors To burn EEPROMs for these processors Use these processors LC 5 01 1K SLC 5 01 1K SLC 5 01 4K 1K max SLC 5 02 4K SLC SLC SLC5 04 SLC5 04 SLC5 04 SLC 5 05 SLC5 05 SLC5 05 5 03 5 03 16K 32K 64K 16K 32K 64K 8K 16K LC 5 01 4K 1K max LC 5 02 4K LC 5 03 8K 8K max LC 5 03 16K 8K max 16K max 16K max LC 5 04 32K 16K max e 32K max LC 5 04 64K 16K max 32K max LC 5 05 16K 16K max 16K max LC 5 05 32K 16K max 32K max S S S S S SLC 5 04 16K S S S S S LC 5 05 64K 16K max 32K max Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 e valid combination Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 25 Selecting Isolation Transformers If there is high frequency conducted noise in or around your distribution equipment use an isolation transformer in the AC
162. est History Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway 00 00 BC 05 00 67 14 20 33 00 00 6C 06 00 6C 14 20 28 00 00 8C 05 00 67 14 20 26 00 00 6C 06 00 6C 14 20 23 00 00 6C 05 00 67 14 20 21 00 00 6C 06 00 6C 14 20 20 00 00 60 05 00 67 xl Relation List New Ethernet Address MAC IP Address 00 00 BC 05 00 68 130 130 130 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Gateway r Status Unable to service BOOTP request from 00 00 BC 05 00 67 No entry in Relation List DHCP software automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network DHCP is based on BOOTP and maintains some backward compatibility The main difference is that BOOTP was designed for manual configuration while DHCP allows for dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to newly attached devices Be cautious about using DHCP software to configure your SLC 5 05 processor A BOOTP client can boot from a DHCP server only if the DHCP server is specifically written to also handle BOOTP queries This is specific to the DHCP software package you use Check with your system administrator to see if your DHCP package supports BOOTP commands and manual IP allocation ATTENTION The processor must be assigned a fixed network address The IP address of the processor must not be dynamically provided Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machi
163. estination node they share the same connection There are two ways to configure the SLC 5 05 Ethernet channel 1 The configuration can be done via a BOOTP request at processor powerup or by manually setting the configuration parameters using RSLogix 500 Programming Software The configuration parameters are shown on the following page and the configuration procedures follow Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 6 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Parameter Description Default Status Diagnostic File The file number of the diagnostic counter for this channel A Diagnostic File Number value 0 read write Number of zero means that no diagnostics file has been configured for this channel The Diagnostic File Number must be an integer within the limits of 7 9 to 255 MSG The amount of time in ms allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with the 15 000 ms read write Connection destination node The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 Timeout to 65 500 MSG Reply The amount of time in ms that the SLC 5 05 will wait for a reply to a command that ithas 3 000 ms read write Timeout initiated via a MSG instruction The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 to 65 500 Inactivity The amount of time in minutes that a MSG connection may remain inactive before it is 30 minutes read write Timeout terminated The Inactivity
164. etween the chassis possibly causing unsafe operation Also make sure the cable is properly secured to protect against the effects of shock and vibration Installing Your Hardware Components 6 13 In multiple chassis configurations install the chassis interconnect cable before installing the power supply The cables are keyed for proper installation The end of the cable that plugs into the right socket in the chassis has the key on the top of the connector The opposite end of the cable has the key on the inside of the connector for insertion into the expansion chassis SLC chassis where processor will be installed Pa EZ 8 _ 2 2253 P Mand 6 E EN Modo od To remove the cable move the tabs on the socket outward and the connector pops out ATTENTION The expansion cable must always exit the right end of the chassis with the processor and connect to the left end of the next I O chassis Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 6 14 Installing Your Hardware Components Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Defining Sinking and Sourcing Chapter 7 Wiring Your 1 0 Modules This chapter describes how to wire your I O modules It covers the following e defining sinking and sourcing e preparing your wiring layout e features of an I O module e recommendations for wiring I O devices e wiring y
165. ever reference other chapters in this book where you can get more information If you have any questions or are unfamiliar with the terms used or concepts presented in the procedural steps always read the referenced chapters and other recommended documentation before trying to apply the information This chapter e tells you what tools and equipment you need e lists how to install your chassis e lists how to install and wire your power supply e lists how to install and apply power to your processor e lists how to establish communications with the processor e describes how to return the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors to initial factory conditions if required Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 1 2 Quick Start for Experienced Users Required Tools and Have the following tools and equipment ready Equipment e medium blade screwdriver e programming equipment e compatible communication cable and or interface The table below indicates with an X which cables are compatible with the SLC 5 01 through 5 05 processors Processor SLC 5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 1747 PIC X X X 1747 UIC xl xl xla yal lal 1747 CP3 X X X 1747 KTX PKTX 2 yi2 2 6 1747 PCMK yl 3 yl 6 10Base T EtherNet X 1 requires 1747 C13 cable 2 requires 1784 CP14 cable 3 requires 1784 PCM4 cable 4 requires 1747 CP3 cable 5 requires 1784 CP13 cable 6 req
166. example heat dissipation calculation e heat dissipation worksheet To select an enclosure see page 2 19 The following terms are used throughout this appendix Familiarize yourself with them before proceeding further Watts per Point maximum heat dissipation that can occur in each field wiring point when energized Minimum Watts amount of heat dissipation that can occur when there is no field power present Total Watts the watts per point plus the minimum watts with all points energized To calculate the heat dissipation of your SLC controller you must consider two things e the maximum heat dissipated with field power applied by the processor all I O and specialty modules and any peripheral devices for each chassis e the heat dissipated by the power supply This is determined by the maximum load on the power supply of the processor each I O and specialty module peripheral device and device drawing power directly off the power supply via the POWER OUT terminals Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 G 2 Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Calculated Watts vs Total Watts You calculate maximum heat dissipation by using one of these methods e calculated watts method e total watts method Use calculated watts if you know exactly how many outputs and inputs on each card are active at any given time This method will
167. forces are present or enabled BATTERY LOW On steady The battery voltage has fallen below a Color red threshold level or the battery and the battery jumper are missing Off The battery is functional or the battery jumper is present 1 See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status Identifying the Components of Your Processor 5 3 SLC 5 02 Processor ee SLC 5 02 o avi an a instruction set n iagnostic capabilities and expanded communication capabilities Hardware Features beyond the SLC 5 01 processors and fixed controllers The SLC 5 02 provides e program memory size of 4K instructions control of up to 4096 input and output points PID used to provide closed loop process control indexed addressing interrupt capability user fault routines ability to handle 32 bit signed math functions built in DH 485 communication channel initiation of peer to peer communication battery backed RAM communication LED when on the LED indicates that there is communication activity on the DH 485 network e program using your programming software e UL listed to US and Canadian Safety Standards CE compliant C Tick marked Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 5 4 Identifying the Components of Your Processor The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the SLC 5 02 processor 1747 L524 Series B and Series C 1747 1524 Series B
168. g Steps i2 dead eG athela Bek 8 6 5 Test Your OUtPpUtS 4 dep dando gad 2g inde hse 8 bedi 8 8 6 Output Troubleshooting Steps 8 8 6 Enter and Test Your Programe Sakae Gad eae Pees 8 9 7 Observe Control Motion s eacug aaas Ses CES eR ERS 8 11 8 Conduct a Dry RUD oie ocd 4 ee hb ee amp Aol a aeons 8 12 Chapter 9 Handling and Storing Battery Catalog Number 1747 BA 9 1 Handline ee eae Gi ea aD ER EP Dad Od a Date eR 9 1 SOTING epa ia i pine n E a p A E ETE iaa pear i Eein 9 2 Transportin t s cal fy a Dn u e al a Bre ee Cae 9 2 Disposal a AE EE a A EE EES PR es 9 3 Installing and Replacing the Battery of the SLC 5 01 or SEC 9 02 PTOCES OT 9 sets Wi as ek we SG E EN 9 3 Replacing Your SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Battery 9 4 Replacing Retainer Clips on an I O Module 9 6 Removing Damaged Retainer Clips 9 6 Installing New Retainer Clips 9 7 Replacing a Fuse on the Power Supply 9 7 Chapter 10 Contacting Rockwell Automation for Assistance 10 1 Tips for Troubleshooting Your Control System 10 2 Removing POWE es Nan nore ea eee E ea aes 10 2 Replacing PUSESS 126 455 rrr RG tad Bo BGM eS PoE ESAS 10 3 Program Alteration 1 0 ee ee eee 10 3 Troubleshooting the SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processors 10 3 Identifying SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processor Errors 10 4 Identifying SLC 5 02 Processor Communication Errors 10 8 Tro
169. g them with the cable tie e Bundle wires Bundle wiring for each similar I O device together If you use ducts allow at least 5 cm 2 in between the ducts and the controller so there is sufficient room to wire the devices e Identify terminals Terminal cover plates have a write on area for each terminal Use this area to identify your I O devices Label the removable terminal block if you have not already ATTENTION Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and common wire Observe all local electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat which can cause damage Capacitors on input modules have a stored charge that can cause a non lethal shock Avoid mounting the controller in a position where installation or service personnel would be in danger from startle reaction Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 7 6 Wiring Your I O Modules Features of an 1 0 Module Below is an example of a combination I O module 1 0 Status OUTPUT INPUT Indicators Ono mo MN Color Band ne mn Terminal Block Screw maximum torque 0 6 Nm 5 3 in lbs Input and Output Terminals Connected to Terminal Block N L Hinged Wiring Terminal Door with Label Terminal Block may be color coded and removable on some modules N BL Sele n
170. h Slave to Slave Routing IMPORTANT The 1747 KE module does not support slave to slave transfers WINtelligent Linx or RSLinx Running DF1 Half Duplex Protocol Master Modem Modem Te 3 i SLC 5 03 Modular Controller SLC 5 03 Modular Controller Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 20 RS 232 Communication Interface Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Data Highway Plus Communication Protocol Overview Appendix C Setting Up the DH Network This appendix provides an overview of the Data Highway Plus DH communication protocol and explains how the SLC 5 04 processors support it This appendix also provides information on the following e DH communication protocol overview e SLC 5 04 processor and DH communication e wiring connectors for DH communication for SLC 5 04 e typical DH network configuration Data Highway Plus implements peer to peer communication with a token passing scheme to rotate link mastership among a maximum of 64 nodes Since this method does not require polling it helps provide time efficient reliable data transport The DH features e remote programming of PLC 2 PLC 3 PLC 5 and SLC 500 processors on your network e direct connections to PLC 5 processors and industrial programming terminals e easy re configuration and expa
171. hases of checkout station a person ready to operate an emergency stop switch if necessary The emergency stop switch will de energize the master control relay and remove power from the machine This circuit must be hardwired only it must not be programmed Use the following procedures 1 Identify the first output device to be tested and reconnect its wiring Math Contact with AC line potential may cause injury to personnel When reconnecting wiring make sure that the AC power disconnect switch is opened Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 8 12 Starting Up Your Control System 8 Conduct a Dry Run Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 Place the controller in the Run mode and observe the behavior of the output device To do this simulate the input conditions necessary to energize the output in the program If it is not practical to manually activate an input device use the force function to simulate the proper input condition ATTENTION Never reach into a machine to actuate a device unexpected machine operation could 1 occur 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 testing each output device one at a time ATTENTION During all phases of checkout station a person ready to operate an emergency stop switch if necessary The emergency stop switch will de energize the master control relay and remove power from the machine This circuit must be hardwired only it must not be programmed
172. he LEDs Indicate Power LED On DH 485 DH or ENET LED Off FLT LED Off or Flashing Status of Run Force Batt and RS232 LEDs does not matter Battery Back up N Se Replace the battery if you want RAM battery backup See page 9 3 Refer to processor major fault recommended action steps Identifying SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Communication Errors The Following Error Exists Fatal Error and No Communication Probable Cause Inadequate System Power 1 2 Recommended Action Check line power Check 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 Also see the recommended actions for inadequate system power on page 10 10 Communication Channel is Shut Down Check communication channel configuration with your programming software Also see page 10 20 to return the processor to initial factory conditions Communication Channel is Damaged Replace the processor Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 14 Troubleshooting Table 10 4 SLC 5 03 SLC 4 04 and SLC 5 05 Communication Errors If the LEDs Indicate e Power LED On e RS232 LED Off e FLT LED Off or Flashing e Status of Run Force DH 485 DH or ENET or Batt LEDs does not matter The Following Error Exists Fatal Error and No Communication Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Probable Cause Inadequate System Power Recomme
173. he Test mode c Select Single Scan SSN test In this test mode the processor executes a single operating cycle which includes reading the inputs executing the ladder program and updating all data without energizing the output circuits However the monitor file function will identify output status as if outputs were enabled Timers are also incremented a minimum of 10 milliseconds each single scan Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 8 10 Starting Up Your Control System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Simulate the input conditions necessary to execute the current monitored rung of the program If it is not practical to manually activate the input device use the force function to simulate the proper condition N ach in a machin y ATTENTION ever reach i to a mac ine to actuate a device Unexpected machine operation could Occur Activate a single operating scan as outlined in the programming device user manual Verify the intended effects on the output instructions for that rung and overall program logic effects Select the next program rung and repeat test procedures as listed above until the entire program has been tested Conduct a continuous scan program test Once the individual single scan rung tests have been completed and proper program operation verified a continuous scan test is appropriate before motion checkout The mode simulates the controller Run mode wi
174. his Device Page 1770 KF3 Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled B 17 2760 RB Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled B Peripheral DTE Hardware Handshaking Disabled B PLC 5 Channel 0 Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled B 1 Peripheral DTE Hardware Handshaking Disabled B ane E ts co o N Personal Computer to a Modem Hardware Handshaking Enabled Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin PC anp 1 8 1 DCD Me DCD 1 8 3 2 RXD f RXD 2 3 2 3 XD gt TD 3 2 20 4 DTR gt DTR 4 20 7 5 com g i l COM 5 7 6 6 DSR f DSR 6 6 4 7 RTS gt RTS 7 4 5 8 cTs je CTS 8 5 2 9 Rl RI 9 22 DTE DCE 1 Connect to the shield of the cable Personal Computer to SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 Processor 1770 KF3 or PLC 5 Hardware Handshaking Disabled 1 Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin PC enp 8 1 2 8 1 DCD DCD 1 8 lt lt 2 3 2 RXD m RXD 3 2 2 3 IXD XD 2 3 20 4 DTR DTR 4 20 y 7 5 COM leg y COM 5 7 6 6 DSR DSR 6 6 IR 4 7 RTS RTS 7 4 me 5 8 CTS CTS 8 5 lt 22 9 RI DCE DTE 1 You can also use cable 1747 CP3 2 Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port 3 Connect to the shield of the cable Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004
175. i Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms fo Cancel Apply Help The Baud Parity Stop Bits and Error Detection selections are identical to the other DF1 drivers Valid Node Addresses are 0 to 254 just like the DF1 half duplex drivers The primary advantage of using DF1 Radio Modem protocol for radio modem networks is in transmission efficiency Each read write transaction command and reply requires only one transmission by the initiator to send the command and one transmission by the responder to return the reply This minimizes the number of times the radios need to key up to transmit which maximizes radio life and minimizes radio power consumption In contrast DF1 Half Duplex protocol requires five transmissions for the DF1 Master to complete a read write transaction with a DF1 Slave three by the master and two by the slave The DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used in a pseudo Master Slave mode with any radio modems as long as the designated Master node is the only node initiating MSG instructions and as long as only one MSG instruction is triggered at a time For modern serial radio modems that support full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance the DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used to set up a masterless peer to peer radio network where any node can initiate communications to any other node at any time as long as all of the nodes are within radio range s
176. i Ja 1747 AIC 1747 AIC a A 0 fa SLC 5 02 Modular Controller SLC 5 03 Modular Controller The DH protocol uses factory set timeouts to restart token passing communication if the token is lost because of a defective node Other devices that use the DH network include those in the table below Catalog Number Description Installation Requirement Function Publication 1784 KTX KTXD PC DH Interface Card ISA Bus Provides DH or DH 485 connection 1784 6 5 22 1784 PCMK PCMCIA Interface Card PCMCIA slot in computer Provides DH or DH 485 connection 1784 6 5 19 1784 PKTX PKTXD PC DH Interface Card PCI Bus Provides DH or DH 485 connection 1784 6 5 27 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Appendix D Control Networks This appendix provides a brief introduction about control networks For more information on using control networks see the following publications Control Network Publication Publication Number Remote 0 Direct Communication Module User Manual 1747 6 8 RIO Scanner User Manual 1747 6 6 DeviceNet DeviceNet Scanner Configuration Manual 1747 6 5 5 DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 6 5 ControlNet SLC ControlNet Scanner Reference Manual 1747 RM623 SLC 500 ControlNet RS 232 Interface Module 1747 5 34 User Manual The Allen Bradley Remote I O Network is a master slave control network that enables chassis of I O operator interface terminals push button panels I O bl
177. ication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 6 Glossary Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Flash EPROM Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory module It combines the programming versatility of EEPROMs with the security precautions of UVPROMs This means that you have the option of leaving your EPROM programs write protected or unprotected Full duplex A high performance protocol that allows simultaneous two way data transmission For point to point applications only Half duplex A high performance protocol where data transmission is limited to one direction at a time Used in point to point and multi point applications hard disk A storage device in a personal computer high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a word housekeeping The portion of the scan when the controller performs internal checks and services communications Initiator A node on the DH 485 network capable of acting as a master When an initiator has the token it can send messages and request replies from any node on the DH 485 network A personal computer running your programming software is an initiator on the data link The SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors can also be initiators Input Device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies signals through input circuits to a programmable controller input scan The controller reads all input devices connected to the input terminals Glossary 7 Inrush C
178. ication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 You can change the Data Table Address Display format and Refresh data every xx seconds fields by entering data in the text boxes and clicking the Change Parameters button To change the refresh data function back to the default of 15 seconds click the Default field To disable the refresh data function click the Disable button Data Table Monitor You may also go directly to the Data Table Monitor screen by selecting it on the home page or by clicking on D T Monitor on the bottom row of the other pages In this case since a particular data file has not been chosen a default screen is displayed 4 1747 L552 Data Table Monitor Microsoft Intemet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation lal Ed File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor Data Table Monitor No Data Table Address Specified Data Table Address i Refresh data every hs seconds Default Disable Change Parameters Module Home Page Module Information TCPAP Configuration Diagnostic Information Memory Map From here you may enter in the starting data table address to display User Provided Pages You can use a text editor to generate up to 16 user provided web pages Each page is stored in four consecutive ASCII files of the SLC 5 05 processor The channel configuration feature of RSLogix 500 version 6 0 or later allows you to select the starting fil
179. ied input voltage must be at or below 132V ac RMS 265V ac RMS in 240 Volt mode 2 Minimum acceptable value of the applied input voltage must be above 85V ac RMS 170V ac RMS in 240 Volt mode 3 The frequency of the applied voltage must be within 47 to 63 Hz 4 Both the positive and negative half cycles must be symmetrical and conform to these requirements Loss of Power Source The chassis power supplies are designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system The time the system is operational during power loss is called program scan hold up time after loss of power The duration of the power supply hold up time depends on the number type and state of the I O modules but is typically between 20 ms and 3 seconds When the duration of power loss reaches a limit the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer provide adequate DC power to the system This is referred to as a power supply shutdown The power supply LED is turned off In multi chassis systems power outages of 20 to 300 ms in duration can cause a remote power fail error to occur You can clear this error by cycling power to your system or by using a programming device Input States on Power Down The power supply hold up time as described above is generally longer than the turn on and turn off times of the input modules Because of this the input state change from On to Off that occurs when power is removed may
180. iees 4 6 hele B 9b amp Rie ae HE Oh 1746 BAS and 1746 BAS T Modules DF1 Protocol and the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processors 5 4 05 9 50 egret ia hang amp brandi wenna Se eae DEL Full Duplex Protocol sn 5 o a eek EW ee eh eae ek ESS Full Duplex Point to Point 0 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol 24 un 44 82 oe eka as eas oi DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Driver ASCII Communication 2 0 0 0 ee ee DF1 Communication Protocol Modems Overview Wiring Connectors for RS 232 Communication Types of RS 232 COnnectors 4nd ete Gea Bae DIE POU ties se ti ch ey ce ead Tae nd EN Ps DCE PINOUT pia 2 35 PAG ESOS SOLES OH PATE ES Pin Assignments for Wiring Connectors Applications for the RS 232 Communication Interface DF1 Full Duplex Peer to Peer anaana 4 SOR ES Half Duplex with Slave to Slave Routing Appendix C Data Highway Plus Communication Protocol Overview SLC 5 04 Processors and DH Communication DHF Channel 1 3 Pin 59 45 46 dn 4 naaa ae PG dod DH Channel 1 8 Pin 49s ea din ak Gare Ge eck BES Ged Wiring Connectors for DH Communication for SLC 5 04 Processors 34 25 eoteg bea eS bs4 es Pees ES Minimizing NOISE 64 Gkdcock ahve Rak hte SG ROT de he Typical DH Network Configuration Appendix D Allen Bradley Remote I O Network Remote I O Passthru ouaaa 40 58 FE 4 4a goersecae hose 8 G
181. igh scales channel to channel passthru DH 485 to DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master DF1 Radio Modem or DH 485 remote I O passthru DeviceNet passthru built in real time clock calendar 2 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt STD 0 50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt DID advanced math features trigonometric PID exponential floating point and the compute instruction indirect addressing logical ASCII addressing in PLC 5 type messages flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS optional flash EPROM memory module available keyswitch RUN REMote PROGram clear faults battery backed RAM additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters SLC 5 03 OS302 processor or higher multi point list SLC 5 03 OS302 processor or higher UL listed to US and Canadian Safety Standards CE compliant C Tick marked Identifying the Components of Your Processor 5 7 The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the SLC 5 03 processors 1747 L531 and 1747 L532 A SLC 5 03 CPU ae O H RU FORCE FL DH485 BATT RS232 RUN REM PROG Battery D provides back up power L for the CMOS SARE RAM Keyswitch NO on 485 m gunna Channel 1
182. in the REM or PROG position and you have the key toggle to the RUN position If in suspend mode check user program logic for suspend instructions Line power out of operating range N Check proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection and incoming power connections Monitor for proper line voltage at the incoming power connections See page 6 10 for power supply installation Improper seating of power supply and or processor in Remove power and inspect the power supply and processor chassis connections the chassis 2 Re install the devices and re apply power IMPORTANT The processor only operates in slot 0 of the first chassis Defective 1 Attempt to put processor in run mode in existing chassis processor power supply or chassis a If the keyswitch is in the REM position and there is no key use the programmer b If the keyswitch is in the REM or PROG position and you have the key toggle to the RUN position N Place the processor in another chassis Apply power reconfigure and attempt to put processor in run mode If unsuccessful replace the processor Se Place the power supply in another chassis and test If unsuccessful replace the power supply If successful replace the original chassis e Power LED On e Run LED On e All Other LEDs Off e Status of any Communication LED does not matter System Inoperable No Major CPU Faults Detected
183. ing high speed communication 57 6K 115 2K and 230 4K baud messaging capabilities with SLC 500 PLC 2 PLC 5 and ControlLogix processors built in RS 232 channel supporting DF1 Full Duplex for point to point communication remotely via a modem or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices Use a 1747 CP3 1761 CBL ACO00 or 1761 CBL AC00 cable for direct connection DF1 Radio Modem for Radio Modem peer to peer communication DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave for SCADA type point to multipoint communication DH 485 Use a 1761 NET AIC with a 1747 CP3 cable to connect to the DH 485 network ASCII I O for connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers serial printers and weigh scales channel to channel passthru DH to DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master DF1 Radio Modem or DH 485 remote I O passthru DeviceNet passthru built in real time clock calendar 1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt STD 0 50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt DID advanced math features trigonometric PID exponential floating point and the compute instruction indirect addressing logical ASCII addressing in PLC 5 type messages flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS optional flash EPROM memory module available keyswitch RUN REMote PROGram clear faults battery backed RAM additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters
184. ingle Cable Connection Orange with White Stripes 6 Termination ae f 5A White with Orange Stripes Q OQ Belden 3106A or 9842 me HX o 48 t R 3 Common oe z a Shrink Tubing J A 2 i n Recommended Y 2 Ground Blue 3106A or Blue with White Stripes 9842 Multiple Cable Connection to Successive Device Drain Wire to Previous Device The table below shows wire terminal connections for DH 485 connectors for Belden 3106A For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue Blue Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A The table below shows wire terminal connections for DH 485 connectors for Belden 9842 For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue White White with Blue Stripe Cut back no connection Blue with White Stripe Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A 1 To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable cut back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after the insulation jacket is removed This wire is not used by DH 485 IMPORTANT In Series A 1747 AIC terminal 5 was called DATA B and terminal 4 was called D
185. ions related P 2 pulses transient 2 30 0 Quick Start for Experienced Users 1 1 R RAM power back up SLC 5 01 or SLC 5 02 processors 9 3 SLC 5 03 and higher processors 9 4 RAM processor specification 2 11 RC network 2 29 read Glossary 12 related publications P 2 relay Glossary 12 relay logic Glossary 12 relays surge suppressors for 2 29 REM keyswitch position for the SLC 5 03 and SLC 5 04 processors 5 16 remote 0 capacity processor specification 2 11 Remote 1 0 Network D 1 Remote I O Passthru D 2 remote I O passthru D 2 Removable Terminal Blocks RTB 7 9 installing 7 10 removing 7 9 using 7 9 removing power from the SLC 500 control system 10 2 Replacing a fuse on the Power Supply 9 7 required tools and equipment 1 2 reserved bit Glossary 12 restore Glossary 12 retainer clips replacing on modules 9 6 retentive data Glossary 13 RS 232 connectors B 11 DCE pinout B 12 DF1 protocol B 4 DTE pinout B 11 SLC 500 devices that support B 3 RS 232 connector pin assignments 1746 BAS to a modem B 16 to DTE B 16 1747 KE to a modem B 15 to DTE B 15 1770 KF3 to a modem B 17 2760 RB to a modem B 17 to DTE B 17 IBM AT to an SLC 5 03 processor B 13 PC to a modem B 13 PLC 5 to a modem B 18 to DTE B 18 SLC 5 03 processor to a modem B 14 to a PC with cable 1747 CP3 B 15 to DTE B 14 Index 7 RS 232 devices 1746 BAS module B 3 1747 KE module B 3 RS 232 definition Glossary 13 RTB 7 9 RTS Request to Send B 10
186. ired to throughput The time between when an input turns on and a corresponding output turns on or off Throughput consists of input delays program scan output delays and overhead Glossary 15 Token The logical right to initiate communications In a multi master network a single token is passed between initiators to make sure two nodes do not transmit at the same time true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred from the controller to a programming or storage device UVPROM An Ultra Violet light erasable Programmable Read Only Memory module used to back up store or transfer SLC 500 programs The SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 can only read from a UVPROM An external PROM programmer is used to program write to the device Voltage Category The nominal voltage used to describe the module watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it causes a fault Watts Per Point The maximum heat dissipation that can occur in each field wiring point when energized write To send data to another device For example the processor writes data to another device with a message write instruction Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 16 Glossary Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Numerics 1746 BAS module A 3 B 3 1746
187. ists general specifications for the power supplies Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 14 Selecting Your Hardware Components Power Supply Specifications 1746 P1 P2 P3 and P4 Description Specification 1746 P1 P2 P3 P4 Line Voltage 85 132 170 265V ac 47 63 Hz 19 2 28 8V de 85 132 170 265V ac 47 63 Hz Typical Line Power Requirement 135 VA 180 VA 90 VA 240 VA Maximum Inrush Current 20A 45A Internal Current Capacity 2A at 5V dc 5A at 5V dc 3 6A at 5V dc 10 0A at 5V dc 0 46A at 24Vde 0 96Aat24Vdc 0 87Aat24Vdc 288A at 24V dc Fuse Protection 1746 F1 or 1746 F2 or 1746 F3 or Fuse is soldered in place equivalent 6 equivalent 8 equivalent 9 24V dc User Power Current Capacity 200 mA Not Applicable 1 Alt 24V dc User Power Volt Range 18 30V de 20 4 27 6V de Max User supplied overcurrent protection 2 15A Not Applicable 15A Ambient Operating Temperature 0 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F 0 C to 60 C 32 F to Current capacity is derated 5 above 55 C 140 F no derating Isolation 1800V ac RMS for 1s None 2600V dc for 1 s CPU Hold up Time 20 ms full load 3000 ms no load 5 ms full load 1000 ms no load 20 ms full load 3000 ms no load Certification when product is marked UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations UL Listed Industrial Control Equipm
188. k Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 13 To install a DH 485 network you will need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable and terminators to the Isolated Link Coupler Install the DH 485 network using the following tools or equivalent Description Part Number Manufacturer Shielded Twisted Pair Cable Belden 3106A or 9842 Belden Stripping Too 45 164 Ideal Industries 1 8 in Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable DH 485 Communication Cable and Isolated Link Coupler The link coupler provides a connection for each node The isolated link coupler electrically isolates the DH 485 communication interface from the processor and peripheral connections Electrical optical isolation is provided to 1500V The suggested DH 485 communication cable is Belden 3106A or 9842 cable The cable is jacketed and shielded with two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire One pair provides a balanced signal line and one wire of the other pair is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on the network communication Installing the DH 485 Communication Cable The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m 4000 ft Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 14 Setting Up the DH 485 Ne
189. k Flashing The processor is trying to establish DH 485 Mode communications but there are no other active nodes on the DH 485 network Off A fatal error is present no communications DH 485 Mode 1 If the LEDs on the SLC 5 04 turn on in a predefined sequence the SLC 5 04 is in the process of downloading a new operating system 2 See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 5 12 Identifying the Components of Your Processor SLC 5 05 Processor Hardware Features Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The SLC 5 05 processors offer the following program memory sizes of 16K 32K or 64K high speed performance 0 90 ms K typical control of up to 4096 input and output points online programming includes runtime editing built in 10Base T Ethernet channel supporting high speed computer communication using TCP IP messaging capabilities with SLC 5 05 PLC 5 and ControlLogix processors on Ethernet SNMP for standard Ethernet network management BOOTP for optional dynamic IP address assignment built in RS 232 channel supporting DF1 Full Duplex for point to point communication remotely via a modem or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices Use a 1747 CP3 1761 CBL ACO00 or 1761 CBL APOO cable for direct connection DF1 Radio Modem for Radio Modem peer to peer communication DF1 Half Duplex Master
190. k performance e number of nodes on the network e addresses of those nodes e baud rate e maximum node address selection e SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 only token hold factor e maximum number of communicating devices The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses start at 0 and are assigned in sequential order SLC 500 processors default to node address 1 The node address is stored in the processor status file S 15L Processors cannot be node 0 Also initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network Setting Processor Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate All devices must be at the same baud rate The baud rate is stored in the processor status file S 15H Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 12 Setting Up the DH 485 Network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Maximum Node Address Setting The maximum node address parameter should be set
191. l electrical equipment and ac power within any facility Use a grounding electrode conductor to connect the ground bus to the grounding electrode system Use at minimum 8 3 mm 8 AWG copper wire for the grounding electrode conductor to guard against EMI The National Electrical Code specifies safety requirements for the grounding electrode conductor Europe Reference EN 60204 for safety information on grounding Also refer to Allen Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and System Installation Recommendations 3 9 Wiring Guidelines Publication Number 1770 4 1 and System Design for Control of Electrical Noise publication number GMC RMO01 United States An authoritative source on grounding requirements for most installations is the National Electrical Code Also refer to Allen Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines Publication Number 1770 4 1 and System Design for Control of Electrical Noise publication number GMC RMO01 In addition to the grounding required for the SLC 500 controller and its enclosure you must also provide proper grounding for all controlled devices in your application Care must be taken to provide each device with an acceptable grounding path This figure shows you how to run ground connections from the chassis to the ground bus The recommended grounding method is shown below Using a ground bus reduces the electrical resistance at the connection Safety Ground 2 mm 14 A
192. ld No Connection No Connection DH Data Line 1 No Connection oj NI OD a A J N No Connection Setting Up the DH Network C 3 The location of channel 1 is detailed in the drawing below SLC 5 04 CPU RUN FORCE FLT DH BATT RS232 RUN REM PROG T DH AA Channel 1 es EH Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 C 4 Setting Up the DH Network Wiring Connectors for DH To connect Allen Bradley devices with other devices over DH you gt must wire the 3 pin cable connectors so that communication can ada for SLC 5 04 occur through the cabling Each device requires its own node address rocessors PROG BATT e R PROC E o M FORCE o COMM o SLC 5 04 CPU SLC 5 04 CPU RUN FORCE RUN FORCE FLT DH FLT DH BATT RS232 BATT RS232 RUN REM PROG o RUN REM PROG Terminating Connector Resistor Connector Terminating Clear Shield _ aaa shel f f 1e le e e e m Shield 2 BI Blue fje e eje fh PLC 5 20 Blue PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER Connector cs ca Belden 9463 Bel
193. lf Duplex protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple slave network capable of supporting up to 255 devices nodes This protocol also provides modem support and is ideal for SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition applications because of the network capability ASCII Protocol The ASCII protocol provides connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices DF1 Radio Modem Protocol The DF1 Radio Modem protocol optimized for use with radio modem networks is a hybrid between DF1 Full Duplex protocol and DF1 Half Duplex protocol DF1 Radio Modem e supports Store and Forward capability e uses a node address 0 to 254 on channel 0 Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 9 The following table summarizes the communication options for the SLC 500 processor family Communication Processor Protocol SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 DH 485 peer to peer receive only receive and initiate receive and initiate DH 485 via RS232 receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate port DF1 via RS232 port receive only receive only receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate full duplex or half duplex master or slave ASCII via RS232 port E receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate te re Plus recei
194. lication as well as the following Allen Bradley publications e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 e Automation Systems Catalog publication B113 Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 3 Overview of Your Modular The basic modular controller consists of a chassis power supply Control System processor CPU Input Output C O modules and an operator ys interface device for programming and monitoring The figure below shows typical hardware components for a modular controller Modular Hardware Components Modular Controller z e Power Processor Input Output Combination Supply Module Module Module 1 0 Module 5 OR a TEES N 7 Programming Programming PC Terminal fe _ e WW W VW A EEESSNY VW LH LH AN AN AN AD g Chassis Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 4 Selecting Your Hardware Components Principles of Machine Control You enter a ladder logic program into the controller using the software Th
195. line to the power supply This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load This power rating is generally expressed in voltamperes VA To select an appropriate isolation transformer calculate the power required by the chassis power supply or supplies if more than one chassis in system and any input circuits and output loads that are connected through this transformer You can find the power requirement VA rating for the chassis power supplies in the specifications on page 2 14 The power requirement for the input circuits is determined by the number of inputs the operating voltage and the nominal input current The power requirement for output loads is determined by the number of outputs the load voltage and load current For example if you have a 1746 P1 power supply 1746 IA16 16 point AC input module 12 mA at 120V ac and a 1746 OA16 16 point AC triac output module 0 5A at 120V ac the power consumed would be 135 VA 16 120V 0 012A 16 120V 0 5A 1 118 VA In this case 0 5A is the maximum rating of the triac IMPORTANT IMPORTANT output at 30 C If the load draws less than 0 5A this figure may be reduced accordingly The output portion of the VA calculation should reflect the current requirements of selected load
196. loating point format C qg format String files are always output as a null terminated text string Binary files are always output as four binary nibbles ASCII files are displayed in a memory dump format Importing User Page Files to the SLC 5 05 Processor Use RSLogix 500 to import user page files to the SLC 5 05 ASCII files 1 In the Project folder under the Data Files folder right click on the first of the block of four consecutive ASCII files where you will import the user page HTML file 2 Click on Properties 3 Click on Import HTML 4 Use the browser to locate the user page HTML file you want to import 5 Double click on the file to select it 6 Click OK 7 Repeat this process for each user page file Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 21 8 When all user page files have been imported go online with your SLC 5 05 processor 9 Select the User Provided Pages link to view the User Provided Pages menu as shown in the following example Z 1747 1552 User Provided Pages Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation Ea Fle Edt View Favorites Tools Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor User Provided Pages ASCI Files A101 A102 A103 A105 A106 A107 A109 A110 A111 A113 A114 A115 All7 A118 A119 Page User Provided Page 1 User Provided Page 2 User Provided Page 3 User Pr
197. ly Configuring Channel 1 for Processors on Subnets If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a processor located on a subnet deselect the BOOTP Enable option by clicking on the checked box Channel Configuration x General Chan 1 System Chan 0 System Chan 0 User Driver Ethernet E Number of Pages 2 Secondary NameServer 0 0 0 20 ma Be m Protocol Control V Bootp Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 1mS 15000 Msg Reply Timeout x 1m5 3000 Inactivity Timeout x Min 30 Contact Location DHRIO Link ID 0 Hardware Address MMAn nannan Aaa e DA Oo BA poge Pass Thru Routing p Subnet Mask o o0 d0 0 Table File Gateway ddress 0 0 0 20 D N User Provided Web Pages efault Domain Name i i 120 EEGA oo oo Starting Data File Number Cancel See the table below to configure the subnet mask and gateway address fields for each processor via your programming software This field Specifies Configure by doing the following Subnet Mask The processor s subnet mask Enter an address of the following form The subnet mask is used to interpret IP a b c d Where a b c d are between 0 to 255 decimal addresses when the internet is divided into subnets If your network is not divided into subnets then leave the subnet mask field at the default If you change the default and need to reset it type 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address The IP address of the
198. mmunication but cannot find other active nodes Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Probable Cause DH 485 communication parameters are set up improperly Recommended Action mi N Se Check communication parameters of programmer Programmer and processor baud rate must match Programmer and processor node addresses must be different Try different combinations of a baud rate default is 19 2K for DH 485 b node address default is 1 Try to increase the maximum node address default is 31 for DH 485 Bad Connection of Communication Device eeN N Se Check cable continuity Check cable connections between programmer and processor Check communication device for example the 1747 PIC replace if necessary Low or No Power to Communication Device N Verify proper power supply selection and backplane loading 1747 PIC and 1747 AlC draw power off the backplane Verify proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 Troubleshooting 10 17 Table 10 4 SLC 5 03 SLC 4 04 and SLC 5 05 Communication Errors If the LEDs Indicate The Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists e Power LED On The processor is Channel is Check communication parameters of channel configuration e RS232 LED Off not transmitting configured for Also refer to your programming software documentation DH 485 mode e FLT
199. monic Glossary 8 modem Glossary 8 modems for RS232 B 10 modes Glossary 8 modules installation 6 6 motor starters bulletin 509 surge suppressors 2 29 motor starters bulletin 709 surge suppressors 2 29 Mounting 1761 NET AIC 4 6 Data Terminal Access Module DTAM 4 5 DTAM Micro Operator Interface 4 5 DTAM Plus Operator Interface 4 5 link coupler 4 4 Modular Hardware Style Units 4 1 mounting dimensions AIC Advanced Interface Converter 4 6 chassis 4 1 4 3 Data Table Access Module 4 5 DTAM Micro 4 5 DTAM Plus 4 5 link coupler 4 4 MSG instruction B 4 N National Fire Protection Association NFPA 3 1 negative logic Glossary 9 noise generators 2 27 noise immunity processor specification 2 11 noise excessive 2 26 normally closed Glossary 9 normally open Glossary 9 0 offline Glossary 10 offset Glossary 10 off state leakage current Glossary 10 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Index one shot Glossary 10 online Glossary 11 operator interface selecting DTAM 2 20 DTAM Plus 2 20 PanelView 550 2 20 personal computer 2 19 output contact protection selecting 2 29 output modules installing 6 6 troubleshooting 10 23 wiring 7 6 output scan Glossary 11 Overview of the Modular Control System 2 3 P PanelView 550 Operator Terminal monitoring with 2 20 PC connector pin assignment B 13 PCCC definition Glossary 11 performance Ethernet processor E 2 personal computer programming with 2 19 pino
200. mware chip orientation matches the upgrade kit directions e Power LED On e CPU Fault LED Flashing e All Other LEDs Off e Status of any Communication LED does not matter CPU Major Fault Initial CPU factory power up condition 1 See page 8 1 and follow the start up procedures 2 Clear processor memory to get rid of the flashing CPU Fault LED Hardware software Major Fault detected erratic repetitive power cycling can cause a processor major hardware fault If the error occurred during the download of a new program to the processor check the position of the J4 jumper See page 10 18 If the jumper is not in the protected position a Place the jumper in the protected position b Re download a valid user program to the processor N Use programmer to monitor and clear the fault or if keyswitch in REM position a Monitor Status File word S 6 for major error code b Refer to your programming software documentation or the nstruction Set Reference Manual publication 1747 RM001 for error codes and additional troubleshooting information c Remove hardware software condition causing fault d Clear Status File 1 13 major error bits if set e Clear Status File S 5 major error bits if set f Clear Status File S 6 major error code optional g Attempt to put processor in run mode If unsuccessful repeat recommended action steps above Se Use the keyswitch t
201. n Installation Function Publication Requirement 1746 BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to third 1746 UM004 party devices Program in BASIC to interface the 3 1746 RM001 channels 2 RS232 and 1 DH485 to printers 1746 IN009 modems or the DH 485 network for data collection 1747 KE DH 485 DF1 SLC Chassis Provides a non isolated DH 485 interface for 1747 IN006 Interface Module SLC 500 devices to host computers over RS 232 using full or DF1 half duplex protocol Enables remote programming using your programming software to an SLC 500 processor or the DH 485 network through modems Ideal for low cost RTU SCADA applications 1747 UIC USB to DH 485 Standalone Provides connection to personal computer s USB port 1747 IN063 Interface Converter and features an RS 232 and an RS 485 port for connection to SLC 500 controllers 1770 KF3 DH 485 DF1 Standalone Provides an isolated DH 485 interface for SLC 500 1770 6 5 18 Interface Module desktop devices to host computers over RS 232 using full or DF1 half duplex protocol Enables remote programming using your programming software to an SLC 500 processor or the DH 485 network through modems 1785 KA5 DH DH485 1771 PLC Provides communication between stations on the 1785 6 5 5 Gateway Chassis PLC 5 DH and SLC 500 DH 485 networks 1785 1 21 Enables communication and data transfer from PLC 17BS KASP Standalone to SLC 500 on DH 485 network Also enables programming
202. n damage integrated circuits or semiconductors if you touch backplane connector pins Follow these guidelines when you handle the power supplies e Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential e Do not touch the backplane connector or connector pins e Do not touch circuit components inside the power supply e If available use a static safe work station e When not in use keep the power supplies in their static shield packaging IMPORTANT If the equipment is not installed and used as described in this manual the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired IMPORTANT If your processor has a battery the battery is an option for the SLC 5 01 1747 L511 processor make sure it is connected before installing your processor into the chassis This provides memory backup for your processor should the controller power supply fail Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 6 6 Installing Your Hardware Components Installing Modules Follow the steps below to install your modules 1 Align the circuit board of the module with the card guide in the chassis Retainer Clip ee Side View E Retainer Clip aa 2 Gently slide the module in until both top and bottom retainer clips are secured O 8 WS WS 7 Qo WH WOH WC e ao 7 PPPI NI
203. n decimal with bold type Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 19 Generating Custom Data Table Monitor Pages You can generate Custom Data Table Monitor pages with your text editor then download them to the SLC 5 05 processor using RSLogix 500 version 6 0 or later The first element of the file must contain a special tag as follows lt ABCDM xx gt where xx is the automatic refresh rate in seconds 01 to 99 A value outside the range defaults to a snapshot display You can modify the refresh rate three different ways e enter the desired refresh rate and press the Change button e select the Default button for a 15 second refresh e disable the refresh by selecting the Disable button Referencing Data Table Memory the Data Table locations in the Custom Data Table Monitor are referenced by placing custom tags into the ASCII file of the processor The format of the custom tag is lt ABDTR file_type file_number file_element elements oformat expand comment gt The items surrounded with are sometimes optional whereas the items surrounded by are always optional You must always specify the basic file reference Depending on which file is being referenced file_number or file_element may be defaulted If the file_type is I O or S the file_number does not need to be specified but the file_element must be specified If the file_type is not one of the three special files the file_numbe
204. n either end of the memory module carrier 3 When the end is partially raised begin lifting the other end in the same manner Repeat this until the memory module has been completely removed from the socket If you have multiple chassis configurations install the chassis interconnect cable before installing the power supply See page 6 12 Also the power supply terminals accept two 2 mm 2 414 AWG wires and are marked as shown in the figure on page 6 10 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Installing Your Hardware Components 6 9 To install the power supply do the following 1 Align the circuit board with the card guide on the left side of the chassis Slide the power supply in until it is flush with the chassis R ol NO A IN iN 7 N aie mt TEN Ss sae E i 2 fh PE Z 1 2 Nm 11 in lbs max torque 2 Fasten the power supply to the chassis with the two Phillips head screws 3 Place the jumper to match the input voltage This does not apply to 1746 P3 P5 P6 or P7 which do not have a jumper ATTENTION Make jumper selection before applying power Hazardous voltage is present on exposed pins when power is applied Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004
205. n external power supply it must be 24V dc Permanent damage will result if miswired with wrong power source Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 18 Setting Up the DH 485 Network Left Side View Bottom View Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The figure below shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the link coupler SLC 500 Ny DH 485 LINK COUPLER CAT SER LISTED IND CONT EQ OPERATING TEMPERATURE FOR HAZ LOC A196 Ke CODE TAC C CLASS 1 GROUPS A B C AND D DIV 2 6 TERMINATION 5A EXTERNAL POWER REQUIREMENTS 4B 24 VDC 25 A T190 mA 3 COMMON N E C CLASS 2 2 SHIELD 1 CHASSIS GROUND CAUTION EXTERNAL POWER IF USED MUST BE 24VDC PERMANENT DAMAGE TO CIRCUITRY WILL RESULT IF MISWIRED WITH THE WRONG POWER SOURCE g O aN9 SHO LAAN OdAre FAC 1P MADE IN U S A CHS DC GND NEUT 24V dc yo 4 OIOI Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 19 You can connect an unpowered link coupler to the DH 485 network without disrupting network activity In addition if an SLC 500 controller powers a link coupler that is connected to the DH 485 network network activity will not be disrupted should the SLC 500 controller be removed from the link coupler Installing and Attaching the Link Couplers 1 When installing the link cou
206. n for the controller 1 Write in the total watts dissipated by the processor 1 0 and speciality modules and any peripheral devices attached to the processor hassis Number 1 Chassis Number 2 Chassis Number 3 O 1 2 3 eripheral Dev 1747 DTAM eripheral Dev 2 Add the heat dissipation values together for your total chassis heat dissipation 3 8 2 4 i 2 ee 17 35 Catalog No 1746 IA 16 1746 IA16 1746 OW16 1746 OW16 Peripheral Dev 2 Add the heat dissipation values together for your total chassis heat dissipation 20 8 3 Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis minimum watts for each device O hassis Number 1 1747 L511 1746 IA8 1746 0V8 1 2 3 U Peripheral Dev ser Power 1747 DTA Cre 37 4 Add toge loadi 5 Use step grap he heat dissipation values her for your power supply ng he power supply loading 4 for each chassis and the hs on page G 6 to determine power supply dissipation 6 Add 2 to step 7 Add 8 Cove 1 Ifyou he chassis dissipation step the power supply dissipation 5 Heat Dis Watts 3 75 25 30 35 8 925 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Chassis Number 2 4 5 7 ser Power eripheral Dev 4 Add toge loadi 5 Use step he heat dissipation values her for your power supply ng he power supply loading 4 for each chassis and the graphs on page G 6 to determine power
207. n that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application Emergency stop switches must be easy to reach See the schematic on page 3 14 Common Power Source All chassis power supplies should have the same power source as the input and output devices This helps reduce the chance of electrical interference due to multiple sources and grounds as well as helps maintain system integrity if power is interrupted The processor detects the absence of power to any chassis in the system If power to any chassis is lost or not yet applied the CPU FAULT LED turns on and all controller outputs in the local chassis are de energized Output states in any remote chassis are determined by configuration settings at that chassis This fault detection makes it necessary that you apply power to the expansion chassis before you apply power to the chassis containing the processor to avoid an unwanted fault Of course applying power in sequence is unnecessary if all chassis have a common power source Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 14 System Installation Recommendations The 1 0 circuits form a net inductive load switched by the MCR contacts Therefore a suppressor is needed across the line at the load side of the MCR contacts Isolation Transformer In many industrial applications a step down transformer is required to reduce line voltage to 120 or 240V ac This transformer also provides isolation to prot
208. n the outside of the enclosure so that it can be accessed without opening the enclosure In addition to disconnecting electrical power de energize all other sources of power pneumatic and hydraulic before working on a machine or process controlled by an SLC controller Safety Circuits Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons like overtravel limit switches stop push buttons and interlocks should always be hard wired directly to the master control relay These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens the master control relay is de energized thereby removing power to the machine Never alter these circuits to defeat their function Serious injury or machine damage could result Power Distribution There are some points about power distribution that you should be aware of First the master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I O devices when the relay is de energized Second if you are using a DC power supply interrupt the load side rather than the AC line power This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn on and turn off The DC power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer Power to the DC input and output circuits is connected through a set of master control relay contacts Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 18 System Installation Recommendations Preventive Maintenance P
209. nday Friday 8am 5pm EST Outside United Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any States technical support issues New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell tests all of our products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number see phone number above to obtain one to your distributor in order to complete the return process Outside United Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for States return procedure Allen Bradley PLC 2 PLC 3 and PLC 5 are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation SLC and Data Highway Plus are trademarks of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 and RSLinx are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Intel and Xerox Corporation UL is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Se
210. nded Action 1 Check line power 2 Check 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 Also see the recommended actions for inadequate system power on page 10 10 Communication Channel is Shut Down Check communication channel configuration with your programming software Also see page 10 20 to return the processor to initial factory conditions Communication Replace the processor Channel is Damaged Channel See your programming software documentation for channel Configured for DF1 configuration information or User Mode Troubleshooting 10 15 Table 10 4 SLC 5 03 SLC 4 04 and SLC 5 05 Communication Errors If the LEDs Indicate The Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists e Power LED On The SLC 5 03 or DH 485 or DH 1 Check communication parameters of programmer e DH 485 DH or SLC 5 04 communication Programmer and processor baud rate must match ENET LED Flashing Processor is trying parameters are Programmer and processor node addresses must be to establish improperly set up different e FLT LED Off or communication Flashing but cannot find 2 Try different combinations of Status of Run Force Batt and RS232 LEDs does not matter other active nodes The DH 485 or DH LED is flashing green Se a baud rate default is 19 2K for DH 485 and 57 6K for DH b node address default is 1 Try to increase the maximum node address default i
211. ne motion or loss of process control Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 10 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Using Subnet Masks and Gateways Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1 configuration screen IMPORTANT If BOOTP is enabled you can t change any of the advanced Ethernet communications characteristics If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or routers you must indicate the following information when configuring channel 1 e subnet mask e gateway address A subnet mask is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to determine if an address is on the local subnet or on another subnet If an address is located on another subnetwork messages are routed through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination subnetwork If your network is not divided into subnets then leave the subnet mask field at the default If you are Then manually configuring channel 1 e be sure the BOOTP enable field is disabled and have a network with subnets e use your programming software to enter the subnet mask and gateway address using BOOTP to configure channel e be sure BOOTP is enabled 1 and have a network with include the subnet mask d gat subnets e include the subnet mask s and gateway address es Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 11 Manual
212. nel 0 of the processor to your personal computer USB port or use a 1784 KTX PKTX or PCMK interface SLC 5 05 Connect a 1747 CP3 cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal computer serial port or connect 1747 UIC from channel 0 of the processor to your personal computer USB port For Ethernet connection connect channel 1 of the processor and the PC Ethernet Card to an Ethernet hub using 10Base T compatible cable 1 Ethernet IP address must first be set via BOOTP or an RS 232 connection See Appendix B for more information 1 Set the communication parameters of software to match the default parameters of the processor Channel 0 Configuration SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 SLC 5 03 DF1 Full Duplex DH 485 e No Handshaking e 19 2K baud e CRC Error Check e Duplicate Packet Detect On e No Parity Channel 1 Configuration SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 DH Ethernet e 19 2K baud e 57 6K baud e BOOTP e Node Address 1 e Node Address 1 e User Defined IP Address Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Quick Start for Experienced Users 1 11 10 Optional Return the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 processor to initial factory conditions Reference Use this procedure if the communication channels are shut down due to Chapter 10 configuration parameters or if you absolutely cannot establish communications with Troubleshooting the processor ATTENTION If you return th
213. nfigure your device using the BOOTP utility perform the following steps 1 Run the BOOTP software In the BOOTP Request History panel you will see the hardware addresses of devices issuing BOOTP requests fd BOOTP Server Bik File Tools Help m BOOTP Request History _ Subnet Mask Gateway Ethernet Address MAC _IP Address 14 18 26 00 00 BC 05 00 3 00 00 BC 06 00 00 00 BC 05 00 67 00 00 BC 05 00 68 xl Relation List New Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Delete i Ernane Bi Dine Disable BO TF Forge Bene r Status Unable to service BOOTP request from 00 00 BC 05 00 68 No entry in Relation List 2 Double click on the hardware address of the device you want to configure You will see the New Entry pop up window with the device s Ethernet Address MAC Ethernet Address MAC 00 00 BC 05 00 68 IPAddess 130 130 130 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 Q 0 Gateways 0 0 0 0 Cancel 3 Enter the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway you want to assign to the device and click on OK Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 9 Using DCHP Software To Configure Your Processor The device will be added to the Relation List displaying the Ethernet Address MAC and corresponding IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway if applicable Ra BOOTP Server File Tools Help m BOOTP Requ
214. ng power 10 2 replacing fuses 10 3 true Glossary 15 U Universal Serial Bus see 1747 UIC upload Glossary 15 USB see 1747 UIC using memory modules EEPROM and UVPROM EEPROM burning options 2 24 V varistor 2 29 vibration processor specification 2 11 W wire types Belden 9463 C 4 wire terminal connections for Belden 9842 A 15 wiring 1 0 modules 7 6 wiring layout preparing your 7 4 Index 9 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using our products At http support rockwellautomation com you can Support find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http support rockwellautomation com Installation Assistance If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information that s contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running United States 1 440 646 3223 Mo
215. nnected to a device with a Catalog Number 1747 C10 or 1747 C11 cable Replacement Processor to Peripheral Programming Communication Cable This 6 096 m 20 ft cable is used to 1747 C20 connect the interface converter to the SLC 500 controller when using personal computer interface software This cable is used to connect the Data Table Access Module to the SLC 500 controller SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 RS 232 Programmer Cable This 3 96 m 12 ft cable has two 9 pin DTE connectors and is 1747 CP3 used to connect the SLC processor RS 232 channel channel 0 to a personal computer serial port SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 Communication Cable This 45 cm 17 7 in cable has two 9 pin DTE connectors and is used to connect the SLC processor RS 232 channel channel 0 to port 1 of the 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 CBL ACO0 SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 Communication Cable This 2 m 6 5 in cable has a 9 pin DTE and an 8 pin mini DIN connector and is used to connect the SLC processor RS 232 channel channel 0 to port 2 of the 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 CBL PM02 SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 Communication Cable This 45 cm 17 7 in cable has a 9 pin DTE and an 8 pin mini DIN connector and is used to connect the SLC processor RS 232 channel channel 0 to port 2 of the 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 CBL AP00 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 11 2 Replaceme
216. nput data from the DF1 device connected on its RS 232 port and forward that data to a connected master on DeviceNet e to monitor output data received from the DeviceNet master and write that data to the DF1 device e to allow DF1 devices to send and receive messages across the DeviceNet network The DNI can be used to interconnect e MicroLogix controllers e PLC 5 programmable controllers e operator interface devices e SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors SLC 5 03 or higher processor 1747 SDN Scanner Master Slave I 0 Peer to Peer Messaging exe DeviceNet Network PC with RSLogix500 and or DeviceNet Manager DNI Module Controller DeviceNet Network Length The DeviceNet network lengths are listed below Network Length Baud Rate 100 m 328 08 f 500Kbau 200 m 656 16 ft 250K baud 500 m 1640 42 ft 125K baud Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 D 6 Control Networks ControlNet Network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 ControlNet systems are designed to e provide high speed repeatable deterministic I O transmission e allow control and message information to co exist on the same physical media e make sure that I O data transfers are not affected by programming terminal activity or interscanner message activity on the network The 1747 SCNR ControlNet Scanner Module The 1747 SCNR Scanner provides th
217. nsient to lt 2 5 ms taken from graph above R Q V Volts I Amps Resistor value Ohms Applied voltage Volts Desired current Amps 24 0 1 240 Q P Watts 12 Amps x R Q Actual Power Watts Desired Current x Resistor Value 0 1 2 x 240 2 4 Watts Resistor size 2 x Actual power Watts 4 8W approximately 5W Use a resistor rated for 240 Ohms at 5 Watts to decrease the transient time from approximately 7 ms to less than 2 5 ms Chapter 3 System Installation Recommendations To help you install the SLC 500 programmable controller as safely and securely as possible follow the specific recommendations in this chapter For general installation guidelines also refer to the requirements specific to your region e Europe Reference the standards found in EN 60204 and your national regulations e United States Refer to article 70E of the National Fire Protection Association NFPA It describes electrical safety requirements for employee workplaces This chapter covers the following e system overview e typical installation e spacing your controllers e preventing excessive heat e grounding guidelines e master control relay e power considerations e safety considerations e preventive maintenance Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 2 System Installation Recommendations System Overview Refer to the following sections when planning your system layout Environme
218. nsion if you want to add more nodes later e a communication rate of 57 6K baud 115 2K baud or 230 4K baud Midhartie A programming device such as a personal computer using a 1784 KT Communication Interface module does not operate faster than 57 6K baud The 1784 KTX KTXD PKTX PKTXD and PCMK can operate at all three communication rates Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 C 2 Setting Up the DH Network SLC 5 04 Processors and DH Communication Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The following table summarizes the type of termination resistor needed to communicate at the specified baud rate with the maximum cable length Termination Link Resistor Value Q Communication Rate Kbaud Maximum Cable Length m ft 150 97 6 3 048 10 000 150 115 1 542 5 000 82 230 4 762 2 500 The SLC 5 04 processors let you operate DH communication protocol by means of the DH communication channel 1 The SLC 5 04 processors also support DF1 full duplex protocol DF1 half duplex master and slave protocol ASCII or DH 485 via its RS 232 port channel 0 The 3 pin connector provided with the SLC 5 04 processors is for actual DH communication and the 8 pin connector is for monitoring DH communication DH Channel 1 3 Pin Pin Pin Name 1 DH Data Line 1 2 Shield 3 DH Data Line 2 DH Channel 1 8 Pin Pin Pin Name 1 DH Data Line 2 No Connection Shie
219. nstruction Set Reference Manual publication 1747 RM001 for error codes and additional troubleshooting information 3 Remove hardware software condition causing fault 4 Clear Status File S 1 13 major error bits if set on Clear Status File S 5 major error bits if set o Clear Status File S 6 major error code optional 7 Attempt to put processor in run mode If unsuccessful repeat recommended action steps above Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Troubleshooting 10 7 Table 10 1 SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processor Errors If the LEDs Indicate Power LED On Run LED On Forced 1 0 LED ON All Other LEDs Off Status of SLC 5 02 Comm LED does not matter The Following Error Exists System does not operate per ladder logic Probable Cause User forced 1 0 is disabling operation Recommended Action N Monitor program file on line and identify forced 1 0 Disable appropriate forces and test system conditions again Power LED On System does not User programmed forces are not Monitor program file on line and identify programmed forces e Run LED On operate per programmed enabled e Forced I O LED forces 2 Enable appropriate forces and test system conditions Flashing again Once forces are enabled the Forced 1 0 LED turns e All Other LEDs Off On steady e Status of SLC 5 02 Comm LED does not matter e Power LED On CPU Major Error Loss of RAM
220. nt Parts Description RJ45 to 6 Pin Phoenix Connector Communication Cable This 3 m 9 8 ft cable is used to connect the SLC 500 fixed SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 processor RJ45 port to port 3 of the 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface Converter Catalog Number 1761 CBL ASO3 RJ45 to 6 Pin Phoenix Connector Communication Cable This 9 5 m 31 2 ft cable is used to connect the SLC 500 fixed SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 processor RJ45 port to port 3 of the 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 CBL ASO9 Catalog 1492 Pre wired Interface Cables 1492 Cable Connectivity Summary For Connectivity Between These Devices Preferred Cable These Cables Catalog Number May Be Used 1746 A4 A7 A10 or A13 Chassis 1746 A4 A7 A10 or A13 Chassis 1746 C7 1746 C9 1746 C16 1747 PIC Personal Interface Converter 1747 AlC Isolated Link Coupler 1747 C10 1747 C11 1747 DTAM E Data Table Access Module SLC 500 Processors DH 485 Channel 1747 C20 2707 Lxxx Vxxx DTAM Plus 1747 AlC Isolated Link Coupler SLC 500 Processors DH 485 Channel 1747 C11 1747 C10 1747 C13 1747 C20 1747 KE DH 485 RS 232C Interface 1747 AlC Isolated Link Coupler 1747 C13 1747 C11 Module 1747 C10 1746 BAS BASIC Module 1746 xx32 32 Point 1 0 Modules 1492 IFM40x 1492 CABLExH SLC 5 03 Processor RS 232 Channel 0 SLC 5 04 Processor RS 232 Channel 0 SLC 5 05 Processor RS 232 Channel 0 Personal Comput
221. nt and Enclosure ATTENTION Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications as defined in IEC publication 60664 1 at altitudes up to 2000 m 6561 7 ft without derating This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IEC CISPR Publication 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications NOTE See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure Also see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the Allen Bradley publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guid
222. o that they receive each other s transmissions RS 232 Communication Interface B 9 DF1 Radio Modem System Limitations The following questions need to be answered in order to determine if you can implement the new DF1 Radio Modem driver in your radio modem network 1 Are all of the devices SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 processors If so then they must all be at operating system FRN C 6 or higher in order to be configured with the DF1 Radio Modem driver using RSLogix 500 version 5 50 or higher If not then make sure that all of the nodes can support the DF1 Radio Modem protocol Once channel 0 is configured for DF1 Radio Modem you will need to use channel 1 to locally monitor and program your SLC processor using RSLogix 500 2 Does each node receive the radio transmissions of every other node being both within radio transmission reception range and on a common receiving frequency either via a Simplex radio mode or via a single common full duplex repeater If so then go to question 3 to see if you can use the DF1 Radio Modem driver to set up a peer to peer radio network If not then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver but only if you limit MSG instruction initiation to the node connected to the master radio modem whose transmissions can be received by every other radio modem in the network 3 Do the radio modems handle full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance
223. o clear the fault Toggle the keyswitch to PROG and back to RUN See page 10 9 If fault occurs again use programmer to get error code and determine the source of the problem Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Troubleshooting 10 13 Table 10 3 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Errors If the LEDs Indicate Power LED On Run LED On Force LED ON All Other LEDs Off Status of any Communication LED does not matter The Following Error Exists System does not operate per ladder logic Probable Cause User forced 1 0 is disabling operation Recommended Action N Monitor program file on line and identify forced 1 0 Disable appropriate forces and test system conditions again Power LED On System does not User programmed Monitor program file on line and identify programmed e Run LED On operate per forces are not forces programmed enabled e Force LED Flashing forces 2 Enable appropriate forces and test system conditions e All Other LEDs Off again Once forces are enabled the Force LED turns On e Status of any steady Communication LED does not matter e Power LED On CPU Major Error Loss of RAM during 1 Verify battery is connected See page 9 3 with Low or No power down Table 10 4 SLC 5 03 SLC 4 04 and SLC 5 05 Communication Errors FLT LED Flashing Batt LED On All Other LEDs Off Status of any Communication LED does not matter If t
224. oad 1860 ms at OV dc no load 790 ms at 11V dc full load continuous at 11V de no load Certification when product is marked UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations cE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN50081 2 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions 1 2 3 4 5 Isolation is between input terminals and backplane CPU hold up time is for OV unless specified Hold up time is dependent on power supply loading See 3 16 for information on power supply under voltage operation See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Power supply fuse is intended to guard against fire hazard due to short circuit conditions This fuse may not protect the supply from miswiring or excessive transient in the power line Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 16 Selecting Your Hardware Components 1746 P7 Current Capacity 24V de 5Vde Output Output Current Current 87A 3 6A 0 625A 264A 0 46A 20A Input V
225. ocessor 1747 1511 and 1747 L514 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 5 2 Identifying the Components of Your Processor LO SLC 5 01 CPU Memory PC RUN Module and CPU FAULT Socket FORCED 1 0 Fa BATTERY LOW O ai i I PA P g S Battery E J over Oona tI Ch 11 Yr _ CM0s RAM ai Left Side View Serial Number and Catalog Number Front View The table below provides a general explanation of the SLC 5 01 processor LEDs Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Processor When It Is Indicates that LED PC RUN On steady The processor is in the Run mode Color red T off The processor is in a mode other than Run CPU FAULT Flashing at power up The processor has not been configured Color red Flashing during The processor detects a major error either in operation the processor chassis or memory On steady A fatal error is present no communication off There are no errors FORCED 1 0 Flashing One or more input or output addresses have Color red been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled On steady The forces have been enabled Off No
226. ocessors are designed to meet a wide range of applications from small stand alone to large distributed systems and from simple to complex applications Processor Features Memory size The SLC 500 modular processors memory is user configurable for either data storage or program storage Memory size ranges from 1K to 64K I O points The SLC 5 01 processor supports addressing of up to 3940 I O The SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors support addressing of 4096 I O The SLC 500 modular processors are supported by over 60 different I O modules including digital analog and intelligent I O Performance The SLC 500 modular processors are designed with throughput performance in mind The program scan time for a typical instruction mix ranges from 0 9 ms K to 8 0 ms K depending on the processor I O scan times range from 0 25 ms to 2 6 ms depending on the processor and J O installed in the system Advanced instruction support The instructions available depends on the processor used The following table lists the instructions supported by the SLC 500 modular processors Instruction Support SLC 5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 Timer and Controller e Comparison e e Basic Math e e e Move Copy and Bit Shift e Sequencer e e Jump and Subroutine e e Messaging e e STI e FIFO LIFO e
227. ocks message displays drives etc to be great distances from the host PLC processor The SLC 500 fixed SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 can interface to this network through the 1747 DCM module for distributed control The DCM allows the SLC 500 to look like another slave device on the network Allen Bradley Remote 1 0 Below is an example of the Allen Bradley Remote I O Network Network PLC 5 or SLC 5 02 and higher processors with 747 SN scanner 000 oo Ti l j sic tieq 147D 1747 DCM 1747 DCM Controller SLC 5 01 SLC 5 03 cen fees ees gl es ess le Gees Gees Gees 8 See Ss Ses 8 SS es e Ess ees 8 8 ss ss HE HEH 1771 Remote 1 0 Network PanelView Operator Terminal Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 D 2 Control Networks S ii 088 E 1747 SN 1771 Remote 1 0 Network With an SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 processor a 1747 SN Remote I O Scanner can be used as the master of a remote I O network i f El it i i i i B88 el fi fi j j j 6068
228. odoy 6 DeviceNet Network oe es Fie png DUE Se Fee Sv ia Bee ee The 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner The 1761 NET DNI DeviceNet Interface DeviceNet Network Length ControlNet Network Racer hci Rid ade Geto poe ae bot The 1747 SCNR ControlNet Scanner Module The 1747 KFC15 ControlNet Messaging Module Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Power Supply Worksheet Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System Table of Contents vii Appendix E SLC 5 05 Processors and Ethernet Communication E 1 SLC 5 05 Performance Considerations 023 44 i268 odie s E 2 SLC 5 05 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network E 3 Ethernet Network Topology 0005 E 3 Ethernet Channel 1 8 Pin 10Base T Connector E 4 Capless Rah chy anew ket egoe tet as eg oh eI ees es E 4 Ethernet Connections c tee senntie Lu oe wae C4 oe ecw iee ae E 4 Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the SLC 5 05 E 5 Configuration Using RSLogix 500 Programming Software E 6 Configuration Vig BOOLP sat eide ame ed eet mate key E 6 Using the Rockwell BOOTP Utility E 8 Using DCHP Software To Configure Your Processor E 9 Using Subnet Masks and Gateways E 10 Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Processors ON SUBNET sierra e set tk rated Sage ee ek sha E 11 SLC 5 05 Embedded Web Server Capability E 12 Module Infom
229. odul lt j 03 5ac ieriacian ss 6 8 Installing Your Power Supply o oo oaaae 6 8 Installing Your Chassis Interconnect Cable 6 12 Chapter 7 Defining Sinking and Sourcing oasa saaa 7 1 Contact Output Circuits AC or DC 7 2 Solid State DC I O Circuits oa es oa eae ne ees 7 2 Preparing Your Wiring Layout naasa aaaeeeaa 7 4 Recommendations for Wiring I O Devices 7 5 Features of an I O Module o oo nanana aaa 7 6 Wiring Your I O Module jsp Siete Bob patel ee Pitas 7 6 Octal Label Kit Installanonivtiey a6 050128 lt 5 IG ER RIGS 7 7 Applying the Octal Filter Label oi p65 eas wee kek 7 7 Applying the Octal Door Label 4 4 g e owe teh eet hes 7 7 Octal Kit and I O Module Information 7 8 Using the Removable Terminal Block RTB 7 9 Removing the RTB oc b 4 08G F Sarto assets Sod oO Bes 7 9 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 iv Table of Contents Starting Up Your Control System Maintaining Your Control System Troubleshooting Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Installing the RUBS 43 oor BA ee eae EES RECESS 7 10 Chapter 8 Procedures for Starting the Control System 8 1 1 Inspect Your installation fo04 24k ae hha sd ee ERS 8 2 2 Disconnect Motion Causing Device 8 2 3 Initialize and Test Your Processor 8 3 4 Test YOurINpUtS asennau eh Rah Aid a aie te ke 8 5 Input Troubleshootin
230. odule configuration power required and verify proper power supply selection See page 2 13 This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is slightly overloaded when output loading and temperature varies Defective power supply N 3 Recheck other probable causes Monitor the line power to chassis power supply for possible transient or shorting Replace the power supply e CPU Fault LED On e All Other LEDs Off e Status of SLC 5 02 Comm LED does not matter Inadequate system power Improper line power voltage selection Verify proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 If the LEDs Indicate e Power LED On e All Other LEDs Off e Status of SLC 5 02 Comm LED does not matter The Following Error Exists Processor not in run mode Table 10 1 SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processor Errors Probable Cause Either improper mode selected or user program logic error Troubleshooting 10 5 Recommended Action Verify selected processor mode N If in program or test mode try to enter run mode ow If in suspend mode check user program logic for suspend instructions Line power out of operating range Check proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection and incoming power connections N Monitor for proper line voltage at the incoming power connections See page 6 10 f
231. of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG 7 1 Preface 3 If you would like a manual you can e download a free electronic version from the internet at www theautomationbookstore com http ab com manuals e purchase a printed manual by contacting your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative visiting www theautomationbookstore com calling 1 800 963 9548 USA Canada or 001 330 725 1574 Outside USA Canada Common Techniques Used The following conventions are used throughout this manual in this Manual procedural steps e Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information e Italic type is used for emphasis Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation tests all of our products to ensure that they are Support fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility If you are experiencing installation or startup problems please review the troubleshooting information contained in this publication first If you need technical assistance to get your module up and running please contact Customer Support see the table below our trained technical specialists are available to help If the product is not functioning and needs to be returned contact your distributor You must pr
232. ogramming software user manual RS 232 is a communication interface included under SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition applications SCADA is a term that refers to control applications that require communication over long distances For more information about the use of Allen Bradley equipment in SCADA applications refer to the SCADA System Applications Guide publication number AG 6 5 8 and the SCADA System Selection Guide publication number AG 2 1 RS 232 is an Electronics Industries Association EIA standard that specifies the electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication One of the benefits of RS 232 communication is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system The distance over which you are able to communicate with certain system devices is virtually limitless Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 2 RS 232 Communication Interface SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors and RS 232 Communication Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The RS 232 channel on the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors supports four protocols e Full Duplex DF1 default e Half Duplex DF1 SCADA e DH 485 e ASCIT Communications e DF1 Radio Modem The SLC and PLC products detailed in this appendix that communicate over the RS 232 communication interface also use the DF1 serial communication protocol DF1 protocol delimits mess
233. ol System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 When troubleshooting pay careful attention to these general warnings ATTENTION Have all personnel remain clear of the controller and equipment when power is applied The problem may be intermittent and sudden unexpected machine motion could result in injury Have someone ready to operate an emergency stop switch in case it becomes necessary to shut off power to the controller equipment Also see NFPA 70E Part II for additional guidelines for safety related work practices Never reach into a machine to actuate a switch since unexpected machine motion can occur and cause injury Remove all electrical power at the main power disconnect switches before checking electrical connections or inputs outputs causing machine motion The first step in the troubleshooting procedure is to identify the problem and its source The majority of faults can be located by observing the diagnostic indicators on the front of the power supply processor unit and I O modules These indicators along with error codes identified in the programming device user manual and software help trace the source of the fault to the user s input output devices wiring or the controller Faults which do not clear by either toggling the keyswitch from Program to Run or cycling power cannot be diagnosed or corrected without programming software A flashing fault LED may indicate the user program in the processo
234. ollowing file types allow the format to be specified e Input e Output e Status e Integer e Timer e Counter e Control Display format Input and Output file elements are output in decimal format Status defaults file elements are output in hexadecimal format with a leading Ox Integer file elements are output in decimal format Complex data types Timer Counter Control are output as a table with bits and important words specified Fixed display Float files are always output in floating point format C g formats format ASCII and STring files are always output as a null terminated text string Binary files are always output as two binary bytes HTML Examples the following example shows an HTML code segment with a short description of what you would see on a web browser Examples Input image word 1 0 HTML Code lt ABDTR 1 0 gt Web Browser Displays the value of the first word of the input image table in the default format of decimal with bold type Timer 14 0 lt ABDTR 14 0 gt the values of the timer in T4 0 in the default format of a table Timer 14 0 lt ABDTR 14 0 d gt the values of the three words comprising timer T4 0 in decimal with bold type N24 0 to N24 3 lt ABDTR N24 0 4 gt the values of the four words in N24 0 through N24 3 in decimal with bold type S 21 to 23 lt ABDTR S 21 3 d gt the values of the three words in 8 21 through S 23 i
235. oltage dc 10V 12 2V 15V 19 2V 30V Example for Selecting Power Supplies Select a power supply for chassis 1 and chassis 2 in the control system below Chassis 1 Chassis 2 DH 485 o Network d EE BES BBE B GES EP 1747 AlC 1747 AlC 1747 PIC Personal Computer Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 17 Chassis 1 Slot Numbers Description Catalog Power Supply at Power Supply at assis Number 5V dc Amps 24V dc Amps D O f ele lee 0 Processor Unit 1747 1511 0 350 0 105 1 Input Module 1747 IV8 0 050 0 000 p m 2 Transistor Output 1746 0B8 0 135 0 000 paa ae Par Module Sot 0 123 3 Triac Output Module 1746 0A16 0 370 0 000 Peripheral device Isolated Link Coupler 1747 AIC 0 000 0 085 Total Current 0 905 0 190 1 Power supply 1746 P1 is sufficient for Chassis 1 The Internal Current Capacity for this power supply is 2 Amps at 5V dc 0 46 Amps at 24V dc Pp Slot Numbers Description Catalog Power Supply at Power Supply at Chassis 2 Number 5V dc Amps 24V dc Amps 0 Processor Unit 1747 L514 0 350 0 105 1 Output Module 1746 0W16 0 170 0 180 2 Combination Module
236. on 000 A 2 Devices that Use the DH 485 Network A 3 1747 AIC Isolated Link Coupler for DH 485 A 4 1747 UIC USB to DH 485 Interface Converter A 5 Example System COnneuration jaija 4av ey hie Rea s A 7 Configuring the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Channel 0 for DH485 4 2006 6 6s ean O08 met ei ES A 8 Important Planning Considerations A 9 Hardware Considerations usa t te o thee eSs ees A 9 Software Considerations 0 000000005 A 11 Installing the DH 485 Network 0 005 A 13 DH 485 Communication Cable and Isolated Link CCITT sag aa paia deeb bs doves aa die tr in u Boge A 13 Installing the DH 485 Communication Cable A 13 Connecting the Communication Cable to the Isolated Link Couplers inces pects san tivegeee eects A 14 Powering the Link Coupler 00 A 16 Installing and Attaching the Link Couplers A 19 Appendix B RS 232 and SCADA Applications 0 00005 B 1 RS 232 Communication Interface Overview B 1 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 vi Table of Contents Setting Up the DH Network Control Networks Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors and RS 232 Communication 2 2 2 0 00000 SLC 500 Devices that Support RS 232 Communication LONE SF Module eeaeee Gee dn eee LD Ka EER 1747 KE Module 6 ah nvinsintic
237. onsiderations 2 26 troubleshooting 10 1 sourcing Glossary 14 Spacing Your Controllers 3 4 specialty 1 0 modules 2 12 specifications processors ambient temperature rating 2 11 certification 2 11 clock calendar accuracy 2 11 humidity 2 11 LED indicators 2 11 local 1 0 capacity 2 11 maximum chassis slots 2 11 memory back up options 2 11 noise immunity 2 11 program memory 2 11 program scan hold up time after loss of power 2 11 remote I O capacity 2 11 shock operating 2 11 standard RAM 2 11 vibration 2 11 Starting Up Your Control System 8 1 disconnect motion causing devices 8 2 enter and test your program 8 9 inspect your installation 8 2 test your inputs 8 5 test your outputs 8 6 start up instructions 1 1 status Glossary 14 surge suppression circuits 2 29 surge suppressors for motor starters 2 29 for relays 2 29 system configuration example A 7 system test general specifications 2 10 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 T terminal Glossary 14 testing inputs 8 5 outputs 8 6 program 8 9 throughput Glossary 14 tools needed for installation 1 2 transistor output transient pulses 2 30 troubleshooting input modules 10 22 output modules 10 23 SLC 5 01 processor 10 3 SLC 5 02 processors 10 3 SLC 5 03 and higher processors errors while downloading an operat ing system 10 18 SLC 5 03 processor 10 9 SLC 5 04 processors 10 9 SLC 5 05 processors 10 9 troubleshooting tips for program alteration 10 3 removi
238. ontrollers AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC The AIC advanced interface converter provides communication links between various networked devices It has three communication ports one for DH 485 and two for RS 232 The AIC is compatible with a variety of SLC and MicroLogix controllers and peripherals DH 485 Interface Converters 1747 PIC RS 232 DH485 Interface Converter For communication with a SLC 5 01 5 02 or 5 03 processor you can use an RS 232 DH 485 Interface Convertor Catalog Number 1747 PIC between the computer and SLC controller The converter includes a 279 4 mm 11 in ribbon cable already attached to the converter for connection to the computer serial port and a Catalog Number 1746 C10 cable for connection to the controller Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 20 Selecting Your Hardware Components Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 If you are using an SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 processor you do not need the 1747 PIC You can program via the RS 232 channel using DF1 full duplex protocol or DH485 protocol and RS 232 Program Cable Catalog Number 1747 CP3 1747 UIC USB to DH485 Interface Converter For communication with an SLC 5 01 through 5 05 processor you can connect the 1747 UIC between the computer s USB port and the SLC controller The 1747 UIC features an RS 232 port for communications with SLC 5 03 and higher and an RS 485 port for communications with SLC 5
239. or and its scanner It transfers files containing a maximum of 256 words and may take more than one SLC program scan to complete negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the desired voltage level Network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links Node Also called a station An address or software location on the network Nominal Input Current The current at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or deactivated They are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 Glossary Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 off delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any applied filter offline When a device is not scanning controlling or when a programming device is not communicating with the controller offset A continuous deviation of a controlled variable from a fi
240. or power supply installation Improper seating of power supply and or processor in Remove power and inspect the power supply and processor chassis connections the chassis 2 Re install the devices and re apply power IMPORTANT The processor only operates in slot 0 of the first chassis Defective 1 Attempt to put processor in run mode in existing chassis processor power supply or chassis 2 Place the processor in another chassis Apply power reconfigure and attempt to put processor in run mode If unsuccessful replace the processor 3 Place the power supply in another chassis and test If unsuccessful replace the power supply If successful replace the original chassis e Power LED On e Run LED On e All Other LEDs Off e Status of SLC 5 02 Comm LED does not matter System Inoperable No Major CPU Faults Detected User program logic error 1 Monitor logic in Run mode and verify desired 1 0 status 2 Check for minor CPU faults Defective 0 devices or I 0 wiring Test inputs and outputs according to 0 troubleshooting procedures starting on page 10 22 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 6 Troubleshooting Table 10 1 SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processor Errors If the LEDs Indicate e Power LED On e CPU Fault LED On e All Other LEDs Off e Status of SLC 5 02 Comm LED does not matter The Following Error Exists CPU Fault Probable Ca
241. oupler AIC e Data Terminal Access Module DTAM e DTAM Plus Operator Interface e DTAM Micro Operator Interface e AIC Advanced Interface Converter e DNI DeviceNet Network Interface e ENI EtherNet Network Interface Mounting Modular You can mount the modular hardware style units directly to the back anel of your enclosure using the mounting tabs and 10 or 12 Hardware Style Units eee maine cre a screws The torque requirement is 3 4 N m 30 in lbs maximum 4 Slot Modular Chassis 1 0 11 Dia a 5 5 Dia 0 04 0 433 So _ ry J A ee eee a Bi PA F i 158 rt 622 1 i l st ET 673 en 5 51 li l i H Ha aa o 1 y ae ee i i L 2 ies y 5 5 Dia T 5 e yY 0 217 AE 1 77 ja em 8 46 g i 285 2 wife 9 25 millimeters moan gt inches Front View Left Side View 1 Dimensions for 1746 P1 power supply 2 Dimensions for 1746 P2 P3 P5 P6 and P7 power supplies 3 Dimensions for 1746 P4 power supply Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 4 2 Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System 7 Slot Modular Chassis
242. our I O modules e octal label kit installation e using removable terminal blocks Sinking and sourcing are terms used to describe a current signal flow relationship between field input and output devices in a control system and their power supply e Field devices connected to the positive side V of the field power supply are sourcing field devices e Field devices connected to the negative side DC Common of the field power supply are called sinking field devices To maintain electrical compatibility between field devices and the programmable controller system this definition is extended to the input output circuits on the discrete I O modules e Sourcing I O circuits supply source current to sinking field devices e Sinking I O circuits receive sink current from sourcing field devices Europe DC sinking input and sourcing output module circuits are the commonly used options Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 7 2 Wiring Your 1 0 Modules Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Contact Output Circuits AC or DC Relays can be used for either AC or DC output circuits and accommodate either sinking or sourcing field devices These capabilities are a result of the output switch being a mechanical contact closure not sensitive to current flow direction and capable of accommodating a broad range of voltages This high degree of application flexibility makes contact output modules very popular and
243. ources without affecting your usage of data table memory except for the size of the HTTP reference Referencing Data Table Memory reference data table memory locations by placing custom tags into your HTML source which specify the data table location and optional formatting information Use the following format for the custom tag lt ABDTR file_type file_number file_element elements oformat gt The items surrounded by are sometimes optional The items surrounded by are always optional Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 18 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 You must always specify the basic file reference Depending on which file is being referenced file_number or file_element may be defaulted If the file_type is I O or S the file_number does not need to be specified but the file_element must be specified If the file_type is not one of the three special files the file_number must be specified and the file_element may default to zero the input output and status files have fixed file numbers When defining your custom tag consider the following Tag Item Description elements If not specified this defaults to one If it is less than one it also defaults to one Each element is output using the same format whether specified with format or defaulted format Legal values are d for decimal and x for hexadecimal The f
244. ovide a Customer Support case number to your distributor in order to complete the return process 1 440 646 5800 You can access the phone number for your country via the Internet 1 Go to http support rockwellautomation com 2 Under Contacting Customer Support and Other Countries click on Click here Phone United States Canada Outside United States Canada Internet Worldwide Go to http support rockwellautomation com Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 4 Preface Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Your Questions or Comments on this Manual If you find a problem with this manual or you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made more useful to you please contact us at the address below Rockwell Automation Automation Control and Information Group Technical Communication Dept A602V P O Box 2086 Milwaukee WI 53201 2086 Chapter 1 Quick Start for Experienced Users This chapter can help you to get started using the SLC 500 Modular Processors We base the procedures here on the assumption that you have an understanding of SLC 500 products You should understand electronic process control and be able to interpret the ladder logic instructions required to generate the electronic signals that control your application Because it is a start up guide for experienced users this chapter does not contain detailed explanations about the procedures listed It does how
245. ovided Page 4 User Provided Page 5 Module Home Page Module Information TCP IP Configuration Diagnostic Information Memory Map D T Monitor User Provided Pages i Click on the User Provided Page X to display that specific page A User Page 5 Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation Fie Edt View Favorites Tool Help 1747 L552 Ethernet Processor Custom Data Table Monitor A116 A117 A118 A119 Address Data Comment 00 0 15 0 0 decimal 00 0 0x000F 0 0 hex 0 0 0000 0000 0000 1111 0 0 binary 0000017 0 0 0 octal E U Hours 23 Minutes 5242 57 Seconds F8 2 2 349248e 07 _ Floating Point B3 0 1010 0101 0101 1010 Binary ST23 3 Hello World String 1422 J _Ascr IN24 0 806 IN24 1 1612 IN24 2 2418 IN243 3224 IN244 4030 lt lt Previous Refresh data every 0 seconds Change Defauit Diseble Module Home Page Module Information TCP IP Configuration Diagnostic Information Memory Map D T Monitor User Provided Pages f You can change the radix display of I O S and N file addresses which appear with an underline 1 Go back to the User Provided Custom Data Table Monitor page 2 In the Address column click on an underlined address to display the radix selection page 3 Click on a radio button to select the desired radix type Publication 1747
246. ower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce hot spots near the SLC 500 controller Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered IMPORTANT Do not bring in unfiltered outside air It may introduce harmful contaminants of dirt that could cause improper operation or damage to components In extreme cases you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build up within the enclosure System Installation Recommendations 3 7 Grounding Guidelines In solid state control systems grounding helps limit the effects of electrical noise due to electromagnetic interference EMI The ground path for the SLC 500 controller and its enclosure is provided by the equipment grounding conductor Scrape paint off panel to insure electrical connection between chassis and grounded metal panel ee SS ain aired Metal Panel Must be connected A 6 to earth ground ESTY VAD Size M4 or M5 10 or 12 Internal P Star Washer 4M or 5M 10 or 12 phillips va Chassis Mounting Tab 5 2 mm 10 AWG to Ground Bus The 1746 chassis the enclosure and other control ATTENTION i i devices must be properly grounded All applicable codes and ordinances must be observed when wiring the SLC 500 controller system Connect Equipment Grounding Conductor to Ground Bus Ground connections should run from the chassis and po
247. ows the processor to scan the I O and program but not turn on any physical outputs Monitor the data in data File 1 the input data file All configured Inputs should be displayed Make sure the first input slot whatever slot number that may be is shown on the monitor Select the first input device connected to the first input terminal on the input module in the I O chassis Manually close and open the addressed input device ATTENTION Never reach into a machine to actuate a device unexpected machine operation could occur Observe the associated bit status using the programming device monitor function Also observe input status LED a When the input device is closed and the signal power is at the input terminal the associated status bit is set to a one and the input status LED should turn on b When the input device is opened and signal power does not exist at the input terminal the associated status bit is set to a 0 and the input status LED should go off If associated bit status and input status LED match input device status select the next input device and repeat steps 5 and 6 until all inputs in the SLC 500 chassis have been tested If associated bit status and input status LED does not match the input device status follow the recommended troubleshooting steps listed below Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 8 6 Starting Up Your Control System 5 Test Your Outputs Publication 1
248. p vs Temperature Curve on page 2 12 2 SLC 5 04 processors manufactured prior to April 2002 draw 200 mA at 24V dc Check your label to verify your processor s current draw Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 12 Selecting Your Hardware Components Memory Backup for the 1747 L511 SLC 5 01 Processor The curve below illustrates the ability of the memory back up capacitor to maintain the contents of the RAM in a 1747 L511 To back up the memory for a longer period of time a lithium battery Catalog Number 1747 BA is required Capacitor Memory Back up Time VS Temperature Time Days 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 41 F 50 F 59 F 68 F 77 F 86 F 95 F 104 F 113 F 122 F 131 F 140 F Temperature C F Selecting Discrete 1 0 There are three types of discrete I O modules input output and Modules combination They are available in a wide variety of densities including 4 8 16 and 32 point and can interface to AC DC and TTL voltage levels Output modules are available with solid state AC solid state DC and relay contact type outputs For a complete listing of discrete I O modules and specifications contact your Allen Bradley sales office for the latest product data entitled Discrete Input and Output Modules publication 1746 2 35 Selecting Specialty 1 0 The SLC 500 family offers specialty I O modules that enhance your Modul control system Modules range in function from
249. pen Deactivated Your program operates as Input device Off state Check device and input circuit though it is on and or the leakage current specifications Use load resistor to input circuit will not turn off exceeds input circuit bleed off current specification Input device is shorted Verify device operation Replace or damaged device Input circuit is Verify proper wiring Try other input damaged circuit Replace module Off On Closed Activated Your program operates as Input circuit is Check specification and sink source though it is off and or the incompatible compatibility if DC input ADU eNCUE MII notturni OT Low voltage across the Check the voltage across input circuit input and check source voltage Incorrect wiring or an Check wiring and COMmon open circuit connections Input signal turn on Check timing specifications time too fast for input circuit Input circuit is Verify proper wiring Try other input damaged circuit Replace module Off Open Deactivated Your input device will not turn Input device is shorted Verify operation Replace device on or damaged Your program operates as though it is on Input is forced on in program Check processor FORCED 1 0 or FORCE LED and remove forces Verify proper wiring Try other input circuit Replace module Input circuit is damaged Verify proper wiring Try other input circuit Replace module Publication 1747 UM011E
250. pler in an enclosure use care so that the cable connecting the SLC 500 controller to the link coupler does not hit the enclosure door 2 Carefully plug the terminal block into the DH 485 port on the link coupler you are putting on the network Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug 3 Provide strain relief for the cable after it is wired to the terminal block This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 20 Setting Up the DH 485 Network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 RS 232 and SCADA Applications RS 232 Communication Interface Overview Appendix B RS 232 Communication Interface This appendix provides an overview of the RS 232 communication interface and explains how the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors support it This appendix also provides information on the following e RS 232 and SCADA applications e RS 232 communication interface overview e SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors and RS 232 communication e SLC 500 devices that support RS 232 communication e DF1 protocol and the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors e ASCII communication e DF1 communication protocol modems overview e wiring connectors for RS 232 communication e applications for the RS 232 communication interface For online configuration procedures of the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors for DF1 protocol see your pr
251. ps are covered more extensively in your programming software and Hand Held Terminal user manuals Reference these manuals if you have a problem completing one of the steps Power up the programming device Configure the controller Name the program Becomes the processor name when downloaded Program a sample test rung not affecting machine operation Save the program and controller configuration Transfer the controller configuration and sample test program to the processor After the new program is transferred to the processor the CPU FAULT LED should clear The CPU FAULT or FLT on the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 LED stops if it was flashing Enter the Run mode The processor RUN status LED should turn on indicating that the controller is in the Run mode with no CPU faults If any other CPU status exists refer to Chapter 10 for recommended action Monitor and exercise simple test rung If a simple test rung operates successfully without CPU faults you may assume basic processor functions are properly functioning If any other processor status exists refer to Chapter 10 for recommended action Starting Up Your Control System 8 5 4 Test Your Inputs After successful processor initialization and test you may begin testing inputs following these steps 1 Assuming you are still online with the programming device put the controller into the Continuous Scan Test mode This all
252. r ignores the destination and source addresses received in the data packets However the processor swaps these addresses in the reply that it transmits in response to any command data packet that it has received By setting a parameter with your programming software you can also make the processor verify that the host computer can receive embedded responses To do this the processor waits to receive an embedded response from the host computer before sending one of its own A host computer that can send embedded responses should also be able to receive them If you use modems with DF1 full duplex protocol make sure that they are capable of simultaneous bi directional communication Typically dial up modems designed to be connected to standard telephone lines can support full duplex 1 The exceptions to this are SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors that have the DH to DF1 or Ethernet to DF1 full duplex passthru bit enabled In the case of the SLC 5 04 the processor checks the destination address in the packet and if it does not match the configured DH address of the processor the packet is forwarded onto the DH network to the destination address DH node In the case of the SLC 5 05 the processor checks the destination address in the packet If the routing table exists and an IP address is in the routing table for that DF1 address the packet is forwarded out to the Ethernet network to that IP address RS 232 Communication Interface B 5
253. r is corrupted and a copy of the program will be needed before contacting your local Allen Bradley sales office or distributor for assistance Removing Power Before working on a SLC 500 modular system always remove the power supply input power at the main power disconnect switch The power LED on the power supply indicates that DC power is being supplied to the chassis The LED could be off when incoming power is present Troubleshooting 10 3 Troubleshooting the SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processors Replacing Fuses ATTENTION When replacing a fuse be sure to remove all power from the system Replacing a blown fuse can rarely restore power supply operation requiring the power supply to be replaced Program Alteration There are several causes of alteration to the user program including extreme environmental conditions Electromagnetic Interference EMD improper grounding improper wiring connections and unauthorized tampering If you suspect the memory has been altered check the program against a previously saved program on an EEPROM UVPROM or Flash EPROM module To receive the maximum benefit of this troubleshooting section follow these steps 1 Identify the status of your processor LEDs See Chapter 5 for a description of LEDs and their different states 2 Using the tables on the following pages match your processor and power supply LEDs with the status LEDs located in the first column 3 Once the stat
254. r must be specified and the file_element may default to zero because the input output and status files have fixed numbers Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 20 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network When defining your custom tag consider the following Tag Item elements Description If not specified this defaults to one If it is less than one also defaults to one Each element is output using the same format whether specified with format or defaulted Any associated comment is displayed only for the first element format Legal values are b for binary d for decimal 0 for octal and x for hexadecimal The following file types allow the format to be specified e Input e Status e Output e Integer All other file types are displayed in an appropriate format If a format modifier is present the format may be changed by clicking on the file type number via a web browser expand Legal values are c and e This modifier determines whether the structure file types are displayed in their expanded or compact formats If a modifier is present the format may be changed by clicking on the via a web browser Ifa modifier is not present the default display of expanded is used lcomment Data after the exclamation point and up to the closing gt is displayed in the Comment column of the monitor Fixed display formats Float files are always output in f
255. r up to 128 discrete I O read To acquire data For example the processor reads information from other devices via a read message relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of binary or discrete logic Remote I O Network A network where the communication between the processor and the T O is across a serial link restore To transfer a program from a device to a controller reserved bit A location reserved for internal use Glossary 13 retentive data Information data that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits RTB Removable Terminal Block run mode An executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the logic program rung A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true energized If all paths are false the outputs are made false de energized save To save a program to a computer hard disk scan The scan is made up of four elements input scan program scan output scan and housekeeping scan time The time required for the controller to complete one scan Signal Delay For inputs the response time required to transmit the circuit status from the fi
256. rams 1 Install a tie wire to secure your wiring and keep it neat If you feed the tie into one hole it is routed back out through the other 2 Cover any unused slots with card slot fillers Catalog Number 1746 N2 to keep the chassis free from debris and dust The octal label kit consists of an octal filter label and a door label Use these octal labels to replace the decimal labels that are attached to the I O modules The kits can be obtained through your Allen Bradley distributor Please refer to p 7 8 of this manual for a listing of octal label kit catalog numbers The octal label kit is applicable when using 1746 I O with Allen Bradley PLC 5 processors via a 1747 ASB Remote I O Adapter Applying the Octal Filter Label 1 Remove the octal filter label from its paper carrier 2 Align the octal filter label numbers horizontally to the module color bar and over the decimal filter numbers as shown in the illustration below 3 Apply the octal label to the filter 4 Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label Applying the Octal Door Label 1 Remove the octal door label from its paper carrier 2 Align it over the decimal door label on the inside of the door 3 Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 7 8 Wiring Your I O Modules Module Color Bar Decimal Filter Label Octal Filter Label
257. rcuit is damaged Use the force function to force the output off If this forces the output off then there is a logic programming problem If this does not force the output off the output circuit is damaged Try other output circuit Replace module Off De energized Your output device will not turn on and the program indicates that it is on Low or no voltage across the load Measure the source voltage and check specifications Incorrect wiring or open circuit Check wiring and COMmon connections Output device is incompatible Check specifications and sink source compatibility if DC output Output circuit is damaged Check wiring Try other output circuit Replace module Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 26 Troubleshooting If your And Your And Probable Cause Recommended Action Output Output Device Circuit is LED is Off On Energized Your output device Output device is Check specifications will not turn off and the program indicates that it is off incompatible Output circuit off state leakage current may exceed output device specification Check specifications Use load resistor to bleed off leakage current See output specifications Incorrect wiring Check wiring Disconnect from SLC and verify device operation Output device is shorted or damaged Verify device operation Replace device Output cir
258. red is 190 mA at 24V dc If both the processor and external power are connected to the link coupler only the external source is used IMPORTANT Always connect the CHS GND chassis ground terminal to the nearest earth ground This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V dc supply is used Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 17 Below are three options for externally powering the 1747 AIC e If the link coupler is to be installed in an office environment you can use the wall mount power supply 1747 NP1 or global desktop power supply 1747 NP2 The link coupler would be powered through either the 1747 C10 cable or by hardwiring from the supply to the screw terminals on the link coupler If you use any of the following chassis power supplies 1746 P1 1746 P2 1746 P4 1746 P5 and 1746 P6 you can use the 24V dc user power supply 200 mA maximum built into the power supply The link coupler would be powered through a hard wired connection from the screw terminals on the power supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the link coupler You can use an external DC power supply with the following specifications operating voltage 24V dc 25 output current 190 mA rated NEC The link coupler would be powered through a hard wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the link coupler ATTENTION If you use a
259. required when inserting EEPROMs or UVPROMs into the programming and erasing equipment To program a memory module see your programming software user manual EEPROM Memory Modules These optional memory modules provide a non volatile memory back up in a convenient modular form The modules plug into a socket on the processor Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 22 Selecting Your Hardware Components Selecting a Memory Module for SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processors Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 You can store save your program in the EEPROM by inserting it into the processor and programming software to download the program You can use an EEPROM module as a master or you can use an archived processor file as the source by using the software PROM translator utility Adapter sockets are required when inserting memory modules into commercially available PROM programmer The memory module fits into the adapter socket and then into a PROM programmer ATTENTION Make sure the adapter is inserted properly into the programming equipment or damage could result The following table lists the types of memory modules that are suitable for the SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 processors Use with this processor type Catalo Description SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 1747 L511 1747 L514 1747 L524 1747 M1 1K User Words EEPROM X X X 1747 M2 4K User Words EEPROM X X X 1747 M5 Adapter Socket X X X
260. res e Do not ship on passenger aircraft ATTENTION Do not charge the batteries An explosion could result or the cells could overheat causing burns Do not open puncture crush or otherwise mutilate the batteries A possibility of an explosion exists and or toxic corrosive and flammable liquids would be exposed Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high temperatures Do not attempt to solder batteries An explosion could result Do not short positive and negative terminals together Excessive heat can build up and cause severe burns Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 9 2 Maintaining Your Control System Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Storing Store the lithium batteries in a cool dry environment typically 20 C to 25 C 68 F to 77 F and 40 to 60 relative humidity Store the batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container away from flammable materials Transporting One or Two Batteries Each battery contains 0 23 grams of lithium Therefore up to two batteries can be shipped together within the United States without restriction Regulations governing shipment to or within other countries may differ Three or More Batteries Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped together within the United States are specified by the Department of Transportation DOT in the Code of Federal Regulations CFR49
261. respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you ATTENTION e identify a hazard e avoid a hazard e recognize the consequence TAATAAN Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present ETETA Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that surfaces may be dangerous temperatures Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last printing To help you find new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph For information on See Removed references to HHT throughout manual Changed CSA Approved to UL
262. rn on and off in a walking bit sequence If the download is successful these four LEDs remain on together ATTENTION Jumper J4 located on the bottom corner of the motherboard provides write protection from any download of a new operating system The out of the box position of this jumper is PROTECT or write protect Without the jumper the processors are write protected Do not place the jumper to the program position during normal processor use Catalog and Serial Number Label P h SLC 500 __ PLACE OS UPGRADE LABEL HERE g CURRENT REQUIREMENTS 1A 5 VDC ace the operating O ie ath au OPERATING SYSTEM INFO o PRERE Up USTED IND CONT EQ G c E ben system upgrade OS SER FRN WHITE 1h FOR HAZ LOG A196 y Pg Om O Lal s CLASS 1 GROUPS A B C AND D DIV 2 label here SERIALNO PROC REV L RAM OPERATING TEMPERATURE CODE T3C BATTERY MADE IN USA N The SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors are protected from the operating system download when jumper J4 is in this position OR e ee ee _ Mother Board The SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 HH processors accept the operating system download when jumper J4 is in this position NS Operating System Upgrade Memory Module Jumper J4 z Socket Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004
263. rostatic Discharge ESD 15 KV 100 pF 1 5 Kohm model Internal Allen Bradley standard Radiated Electromagnetic Susceptibility 5W walkie talkie at 464 5 MHz and 153 05 MHz Internal Allen Bradley standard Safety Dielectric Withstand 1500V ac UL 508 CSA C22 2 No 142 Isolation between Communication Circuits 500V dc Not Applicable Isolation between Backplane and I Os 1500V ac Not Applicable Flammability and Electrical Ignition UL94 V 0 Not Applicable Certification UL listed to US and Canadian Safety Standards Class 1 Groups A B C or D Division 2 CE compliant for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts Not Applicable 1 Internal Allen Bradley standards are based o specifications Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 n Allen Bradley s extensive experience in industrial controls They are also based partly on industry and or military Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 11 Processor General Specifications The table below lists general specifications for SLC 500 modular processors Specification SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 1747 L511 L514 L524 L531 1532 1541 1542 1543 1551 L552 L553 Program Memory 1K AK 4K 8K 16K 16K 32K 64K 16K 32K 64K words 1 0 Capacity 3940 Discrete 4096 Discrete Remote 0 C
264. s In general we recommend that the transformer is oversized to provide some margin for line voltage variations and other factors Typically a transformer that is 25 larger than the calculated VA is sufficient Most industrial environments are susceptible to power transients or spikes To help insure fault free operation and protection of equipment use suppression devices on power line to the equipment in addition to the isolation equipment Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 26 Selecting Your Hardware Components Special Considerations Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 The recommendations given previously provide favorable operating conditions for most controller installations Some applications may involve adverse conditions such as excessive line voltage variations and of excessive noise as described below Additional measures can be taken to minimize the effect of these conditions Class I Division 2 Applications IMPORTANT When installing peripheral devices for example push buttons lamps into a hazardous environment ensure that they are Class I Division 2 certified or determined to be safe for the environment Excessive Line Voltage Variations The best solution for excessive line voltage variation is to correct any feeder problems in your distribution system Where this does not solve the line variation problem or in certain critical applications use a constant voltage tran
265. s Allen Bradley Remote 1 0 D 1 ControlNet D 6 DeviceNet D 3 overview D 1 Remote 1 0 Network D 1 control profile Glossary 3 control program Glossary 3 controller definition Glossary 3 overhead Glossary 3 ControlNet Messaging Module D 6 ControlNet Network D 6 1747 KFC15 D 6 1747 SCNR D 6 ControlNet Scanner D 6 counters definition Glossary 3 CPU central processing unit definition Glossary 3 CTS Clear to Send B 10 D data highway plus communication protocol overview C 1 typical configuration C 6 using the SLC 5 04 processors C 2 wiring the SLC 5 04 processors C 4 data packets B 4 data table Glossary 3 Data Table Access Module monitoring with 2 20 mounting dimensions 4 5 DCD Data Carrier Detect B 10 DCE Data Communication Equipment B 10 DeviceNet Interface D 4 DeviceNet Network D 3 1747 SDN D 3 1761 NET DNI D 4 length D 5 DeviceNet Scanner D 3 DF1 full duplex B 4 DF1 half duplex protocol B 5 DF1 protocol full duplex B 4 half duplex B 5 modem overview B 10 overview B 4 DF1 Radio Modem SLC 5 03 processor feature 5 6 SLC 5 04 processor feature 5 9 SLC 5 05 processor feature 5 12 DH network devices that use the 1784 KTX card C 6 1784 KTXD card C 6 1784 PCMK card C 6 DH 485 Interface Converters 1747 PIC 2 19 1747 UIC 2 20 DH 485 network description A 1 devices that use the 1746 BAS module A 3 Index 3 1747 KE module A 3 1747 UIC A 3 1770 KF3 module A 3 1784 PCMK card A 3 example system configuration
266. s remove the module by pressing the retainer clips at both the top and bottom of the module and sliding it out 2 Locate the socket or connector if you have an SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 on the processor board Then place the memory module into the socket or onto the connector and press firmly in place Side View of SLC Processor Side View of SLC Processor B 1747 L524 Series C 1747 L531 L532 L541 L542 L543 L551 L552 and L553 f ae Moule Module Socket O Connector Jumper J1 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 6 8 Installing Your Hardware Components 3 Place jumper J1 as shown below Processor Type 1747 M1 M2 M3 1747 M4 Invalid Settings 1747 1514 L524 Series B and Series C ogo ogo OOO opo stad bbb O 1747 L511 L531 L532 L541 L542 L543 L551 L552 and L553 No Jumper J1 No Jumper J1 No Jumper J1 Installing Your Power Supply Removing the Memory Module 4 Install the processor module into the chassis 5 Restore power to the controller To remove a memory module use the following procedure 1 Remove power and pull out the processor 2 Grasp the carrier tabs or connector for the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 with your thumb and index fingers then gently but firmly lift upwards o
267. s 31 for DH 485 Bad Connection of Communication Device s N Se Check cable continuity Check cable connections between programmer and processor Check communication device for example the 1747 PIC replace if necessary Low or No Power to Communication Device N Verify proper power supply selection and backplane loading 1747 PIC and 1747 AIC draw power off the backplane Verify proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 Duplicate drop is Another DH 1 Remove this device from the DH network detected The DH device is already LED is flashing on the DH 2 Cycle power red network at this node address 3 Reset the node address to an unused node before reconnecting device to the DH network Can perform reset if on line via channel 0 RS 232 port without disconnecting from DH An ENET fault is being reported via a code The ENET LED is flashing red A hardware or software fault has occurred Contact Rockwell Automation for assistance Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 16 Troubleshooting Table 10 4 SLC 5 03 SLC 4 04 and SLC 5 05 Communication Errors If the LEDs Indicate e Power LED On e RS232 LED Flashing e FLT LED Off or Flashing e Status of Run Force DH 485 DH or ENET or Batt LEDs does not matter The Following Error Exists The processor is trying to establish co
268. s in a chassis is used to select the appropriate chassis power supply Baud Rate The speed of communication between devices on a network All devices must communicate at the same baud rate For example the DH 485 network devices default to 19 200 baud bit The smallest unit of memory used in discrete or binary logic where the value 1 represents ON and 0 represents OFF block diagrams A method used to illustrate logic components or a sequence of events Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 Glossary Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response of T or F BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A low level protocol that provides configuration information to other nodes on a TCP IP network with DOS Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 9x VMS and HP UNIX platforms branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program Its primary use is to build OR logic Calculated Watts The amount of heat generated by those points energized on an I O module Channel Communication port on a module Chassis A hardware assembly that houses devices such as I O modules adapter modules processor modules and power supplies CIP Control and Information Protocol DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol communication s
269. s the LED is FLASHING 8 Load your software Reference Refer to your software package s documentation Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 1 10 Quick Start for Experienced Users 9 Establish communications to the processor Reference Follow the steps below Chapter 8 Starting Up Your Refer to the following to establish communications between the processor and your personal computer Comms Channel SLC 5 01 and 5 02 DH 485 e 19 2K baud e Node Address 1 Processor SLC 5 01 Control System Procedure Connect 1747 PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial port or connect 1747 UIC from the processor to your personal computer USB port or use a 1784 KTX PKTX or PMCK interface SLC 5 02 Connect 1747 PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial port or connect 1747 UIC from the processor to your personal computer USB port or use a 1784 KTX PKTX or PMCK interface SLC 5 03 Connect 1747 PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial port or connect 1747 UIC from the processor to your personal computer USB port or use a 1784 KTX PKTX or PMCK interface or a 1747 CP3 cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal computer serial port SLC 5 04 Connect a 1747 CP3 cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal computer serial port or connect 1747 UIC from chan
270. sformer If you require a constant voltage transformer connect it to the power supply and all input devices connected to the SLC 500 controller Connect output devices on the same power line but their connection along the power line is normally made before the constant voltage transformer A constant voltage transformer must have a sufficient power rating for its load Excessive Noise When operating the SLC 500 controller in an environment with a high amount of electrical noise give special consideration to the possibility of electrical interference The following reduces the effect of electrical interference e SLC 500 controller design features e proper mounting of controller within an enclosure e proper equipment grounding e proper routing of wires power communications control lines e proper suppression added to noise generating devices Selecting Your Hardware Components 2 27 Potential sources of noise include inductive loads such as relays solenoids and motor starters when operated by hard contacts like push buttons or selector switches Suppression may be necessary when such loads are connected as output devices or when connected to the same supply line that powers the controller Lack of surge suppression on inductive loads may contribute to processor faults and sporadic operation RAM can be corrupted lost and I O modules may appear to be faulty or reset themselves For extremely noisy environments
271. source Rockwell Automation representative On Off Off On Off On On Corrupted The operating system Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself If the Operating on the Flash EPROM is error persists either contact your Rockwell Automation System Memory corrupt representative for a new operating system memory Module module or download the old operating system On Off On On Off On Off Flash EPROM The processor flash is Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself If the Failure corrupt error clears you should be able to download the operating system If the error persists contact your Rockwell Automation representative On Off On On On On Off Corrupt or The operating system Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself If the Missing is missing or has been error clears you should be able to download the Operating corrupted operating system If the error persists contact your System Rockwell Automation representative for a new operating system On Off On On Off On On Downloadable Failure during Download the operating system Operating transmission of System Failure downloadable operating system On Off Off On On On Off Incompatible The upgrade of the Use an operating system that is compatible with your Platform operating system is processor hardware incompatible with the processor hardware On Off Off On On On On Memory An attempt was made
272. ssage the SLC 5 05 must first establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP address on the Ethernet network A connection is established when a MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists When a MSG instruction executes the SLC 5 05 checks to see whether a connection has been established with the destination node If a connection has not been established the SLC 5 05 attempts to establish a connection of the peer type In order to receive messages from another device on Ethernet an incoming connection must be established This incoming connection is made by the sending processor and uses one incoming connection in the receiving processor The SLC 5 05 supports a maximum of 16 connections for 1747 L551 and 24 connections for 1747 L552 and L553 allowing simultaneous communication with up to 16 other devices or applications The connections are dedicated as follows Number of Connections Dedicated to 4 outgoing connections 4 incoming connections al2 or 16 3 either incoming or outgoing connections 1 Connections established by an INTERCHANGE client RSLinx client and peers are all included when counting the number of connections 2 1747 L551 processor 3 1747 552 L553 processors with 0S501 Series C FRN 5 or higher only ma o outgoing connections no more that one connection per destination node is established If multiple MSG instructions use the same d
273. ssis anaana aaa 4 2 13 Slot Modular Chassis aoaaa aaa 4 3 Identifying the Components of Your Processor Installing Your Hardware Components Wiring Your 1 0 Modules Table of Contents iii Link Coupler AIC oaaae 4 4 Data Table Access Module DTAM DTAM Plus and DTAM MICO ea ek ea n Wd Ske liad 4 5 AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC DeviceNet Interface 1761 NET DND Ethernet Interface 1761 NET END 4 6 Chapter 5 SLC 5 01 Processor Hardware Features 0 050s es 5 1 SLC 5 02 Processor Hardware Features 5 3 SLC 5 03 Processor Hardware Features 5 6 SLC 5 04 Processor Hardware Features 5 9 SLC 5 05 Processor Hardware Features 5 12 Keyswitch for the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SEG 5 05 PrOCESSONS i rps pnd br htep ai ee O E 5 15 RUN Position Sr aca Fe Bk ORG EOS RR HOR REOKE Ee 5 15 PROG Positions o persapa st shad ep a ded aR ee eR 5 15 REM POSION sece 5 4 5 dec p04 pov hee ee lo Seb dod eae geet Ae 5 16 Chapter 6 Compliance to European Union Directives 6 1 EMC DreciVes inca eee Senger epities 2S ra Ea 6 1 Low Voltage Directive 4 ing 8 ony twee eee eee 6 2 Installing Your Chassis jest coca hope he Klas eA pale RE 6 2 Installing Your Processor ators pee Seas Foe eek ees 6 5 Installing Modules ox a4 hoodie Se Eh i os Ge Reed ee See 6 6 Installing Your Memory Module 000 6 7 Removing the Memory M
274. sted to meet Council Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file e EN 50081 2 EMC Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment e EN 50082 2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 6 2 Installing Your Hardware Components Installing Your Chassis Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific information required by EN61131 2 see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the following Allen Bradley publications e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 e Automation Systems Catalog publication B113 The power supply support panel left end panel has screws as indicated in the following illustration The center and right end panels are held in position by a molded latch and do not require screws Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Installing Your Hardware Components 6 3 To install your chassis 1 Drill holes in the back panel of the enclosure for chassis mounting tabs Be careful of met
275. sually the initiator with the lowest address claims the token When a initiator has the token it will begin to build the network The network requires at least one initiator to initialize it Building a network begins when the initiator that claimed the token tries to pass the token to the successor node If the attempt to pass the token fails or if the initiator has no established successor for example when it powers up it begins a linear search for a successor starting with the node above it in the addressing When the initiator finds another active initiator it passes the token to that node which repeats the process until the token is passed all the way around the network to the first node At this point the network is in a state of normal operation Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 3 Devices that Use the DH 485 Network Presently the following SLC 500 devices support the DH 485 network e SLC 500 Fixed I O Controller responder e SLC 5 01 Modular I O Controller responder e SLC 5 02 Modular I O Controller initiator responder e SLC 5 03 Modular I O Controller Ginitiator responder e SLC 5 04 Modular I O Controller initiator responder e SLC 5 05 Modular I O Controller Gnitiator responder e Personal computer running your programming software Ginitiator e DTAM initiator responder Other devices that use the DH 485 network include those in the table below Catalog Number Descriptio
276. switch Toggle the keyswitch from RUN to PROG and then back to RUN this will clear some faults If the keyswitch is left in the RUN position the j processor mode cannot be changed from a programmer operator interface device If you return the keyswitch to the REM position you Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 10 Troubleshooting can then use a programmer operator interface device to change the processor mode ATTENTION If you clear a processor fault using the keyswitch the processor immediately enters the Run mode Identifying SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Errors The following LEDs and tables provide you with information regarding error messages possible cause s for the error and recommended action to resolve the error Table 10 3 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Errors If the LEDs Indicate e All LEDs Off e Status of any Communication LED does not matter The Following Error Exists Inadequate system power Probable Cause No line power Recommended Action lt N Verify proper line voltage and connections on the power terminals Verify proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 Power supply fuse blown N Check the incoming power fuse check for proper incoming power connections Replace fuse If fuse blows again replace the power supply See page 9 7 on fuse replacement Power supply overload
277. t chassis above each other the distance cannot exceed 10 2 to 12 7 cm 4 to 5 in B Greater than 10 2 cm 4 in C Greater than 15 3 cm 6 in SLC 500 C D 7 7 to 10 2 cm 3 to 4 in when using the 1746 C7 cable Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 1 4 Quick Start for Experienced Users 2 Drill holes in the backpanel of your enclosure and install the top mounting Chapter 6 hardware Use M4 or M5 10 or 12 phillips screw and star washer or Installing Your SEM screw Hardware Components 3 Scrape off the paint from the backpanel between the chassis and backpanel 4 Slide the chassis over the installed hardware and tighten the screws 5 Install the remaining tab hardware Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Quick Start for Experienced Users 1 5 3 Install the power supply Reference Follow the steps below Chapter 6 Installing Your 1 Align the circuit board of the power supply with the card guides on the left Hardware Components side of the chassis and slide the power supply in until it is flush with the chassis fE _fS i WH WN RN WE WH WE CC 2 Fasten the power supply to the chassis Q w N D Tii a Use these screws to fasten the power supply to the chassis 1 2 Nm 11 in lbs maximum torque Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 20
278. t or a motor starter coil that is energized by the programmable controller output scan The controller turns on off or modifies the devices connected to the output terminals PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Commands Points per Common The number of input or output points connected to a single return common or supply vco Poll Message A poll message is a point to point transfer of data sent by the scanner that solicits a response from a single device The device responds with its data bit and status bit processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU processor files The set of program and data files resident in the controller program file Areas within a processor that contain the logic programs SLC controllers support multiple program files Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 12 Glossary Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 program mode When the controller is not scanning the control program program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the program scan the logic program is processed and the Output Image is updated programming device Programming package used to develop ladder logic diagrams Protocol The language or packaging of information that is transmitted across a network i O Rack An I O addressing unit that corresponds to 8 input image table words and 8 output image table words A rack can contain a maximum of 8 I O groups fo
279. tem power is off Then insert the processor into the 1746 chassis Chapter 6 Installing Your Hardware IMPORTANT The SLC 500 Modular Processor must be inserted into the left slot Components slot 0 as shown below Remove the protective label on the power supply after installing the processor S _ fol RS W WS W WA WH WH CA J gt Protective Label Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Quick Start for Experienced Users 1 9 7 Apply power to the processor Reference Follow the steps below Chapter 8 Starting Up Your 1 Energize the chassis power supply Control System 2 Check the chassis power supply and processor LEDs The power LED on the power supply should be on and the fault LED on the processor should be Chapter 10 flashing Troubleshooting Power supply and SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 LEDs Power supply and SLC 5 03 and SLC 5 04 LEDs mm POWER RUN COMM mg POWER CPU FAULT FORCED 1 0 BATTERY LOW The RUN LED on the SLC 5 01 processor is The DH485 LED on the SLC 5 03 processor is actually labeled PC RUN Also the SLC 5 01 labeled DH on the SLC 5 04 processor processor does not have a COMM LED Power supply and SLC 5 05 LEDs Refer to the following key to determine the status of the LED indicators EE POWER RUN Indicates the LED is off i Indicates the LED is on C Indicate
280. termine the Total Current Total Current 3 For 1746 P4 power supplies calculate the total power consumption of all system devices If you are not using a 1746 P4 go to step 4 Total Current at 5V dc ooo e Total Current at 5V de Ooo DW ee Total Current Total Current 24V at 24V dc at 24V dc User Current User Current 24V at 24V dc at 24V dc Add the Watts values to determine Total Power Add the Watts values to determine Total Power cannot exceed 70 Watts 4 Choose the power supply from the list of catalog numbers shown below Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current capacity of the power supplies Be sure that the Total Current consumption for the chassis is less than the Internal Current Capacity for the power supply for both 5V and 24V loads Catalog Number Internal Current Catalog Number Internal Current Capacity Capacity a a O E CE om ra smn T TIGA 1746 P7 1746 P7 patina 55k Joa Required Power Supply a Required Power Supply eet 1 See 1746 P7 current capacity chart on page 2 16 cannot exceed 70 Watts Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Definition of Key Terms Calculating Module Heat Dissipation Appendix G Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System This appendix will assist you in calculating the heat dissipation of your SLC 500 controller It consists of the following e definition of key terms e table and graphs e
281. the network Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable You must install a link coupler 1747 AIC for each node on the network If you plan to add nodes later provide additional link couplers during the initial installation to avoid recabling after the network is in operation The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m 4000 fv This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node on the network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 10 Setting Up the DH 485 Network Planning Cable Routes Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference e Keep the communication cable at least 1 52 m 5 ft from any electric motors transformers rectifiers generators arc welders induction furnaces or sources of microwave radiation e If you must run the cable across power feed lines run the cable at right angles to the lines e If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 15 m 6 in from ac power lines of less than 20A 0 30 m 1 ft from lines greater than 20A but only up to 100k VA and 0 60 m 2 ft from lines of 100k VA or more e If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 08 m in from ac power lines of less than 20A 0 15 m 6 in from lines greater than 20A but only up to 100k VA and 0 3
282. thout energizing the external outputs Use the following steps to further verify proper program and system function operation a b C d e lane Remain or return to an online condition with the processor Monitor the file Select Test mode Select the Continuous Scan test Simulate the input conditions necessary to execute system functions Verify the intended operation of each system function and the effects of other system functions ATTENTION Never reach into a machine to actuate a device Unexpected machine operation could Occur Starting Up Your Control System 8 11 7 Observe Control Motion Now that program execution has been verified checkout of control motion can begin All persons involved with the programming installation layout design machine or process design and maintenance should be involved in making decisions for determining the best and safest way to test the total system The following procedures are general in nature Individual conditions may warrant their modification The basic approach is to initiate testing with the least amount of machine motion Only some outputs are allowed to generate machine motion Then additional machine motion can be gradually added thereby allowing any problems to be detected more easily under controlled conditions The following procedure provides the steps for testing machine motion using one output at a time ATTENTION During all p
283. tion The following symbols are used 1 NEMA rated enclosure suitable for your application and environment that shields your controller from electrical noise and airborne contaminants 2 Disconnect 4 Device MCR 2 Disconnect device to remove power 6 Suppression devices for limiting EMI electromagnetic interference generation 6 from the system l 3 Isolation 3 Fused isolation transformer or a l Transformer constant voltage transformer as your application requires 4 Master control relay emergency stop 5 circuit SLC 500 Controller 5 Terminal blocks or wiring ducts ATTENTION Vertical mounting is not recommended due to thermal considerations Spacing Your Controller The figure on the following page depicts acceptable layouts Follow the recommended minimum spacing to allow for convection cooling within the enclosure Air temperature in the enclosure must be kept within a range of 0 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting IMPORTANT IMPORTANT holes for the controllers Do not drill holes above a mounted SLC 500 controller Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 System Installation Recommendations 3 5 1746 C9 and 1746 C16 cables have a rigid IMPORTANT IMPORTANT unbendable shrink wrap applied at the end of each connector which provides strain relief When using these cables provid
284. tly to a Interface Converter computer s USB port It features an RS 232 port for connection to SLC 5 03 and higher processors MicroLogix PanelView 300 and higher terminals 1761 NET AIC and Logix controllers as well as an RS 485 port for connection to SLC 5 03 and lower processors PanelView 300 and higher terminals and 1747 AIC The 1747 UIC can communicate with devices on the DH 485 network at 19 2K baud Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 A 6 Setting Up the DH 485 Network Connecting to the RS 232 Port Connecting to the RS 485 Port Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 PanelView 300 and SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 r higher Channel 0 PC with a2 2 USB Port gE SES cb 9 m i i HIH gt H SST 28 1747 UIC LER EAA F Gi CompactLogix U9 ace or os ControlLogix MicroLogix Connect the following DH 485 equipment to the RS 232 port SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Channel 0 using cable 1747 CP3 1756 CP3 1761 NET AIC AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1747 CP3 1756 CP3 Port 1 9 pin D 1761 CBL PM02 Port 2 8 pin DIN PanelView 300 and higher with RS 232 DH 485 port 2711 NC13 MicroLogix PanelView 300 Micro DH 485 1761 CBL PM02 Comp
285. twork Link Coupler 1747 AlC c Peripheral CPU Power Belden 3106A or 9842 Els Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Connector When cutting cable segments make them long enough to route them from one link coupler to the next with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable Belden 3106A or 9842 Belden 3106A or 9842 Link Coupler Link Coupler 1747 AlC 1747 AIC Connector CPU CPU Connector Gd Peripheral mi Peripheral ws Power ms Power o o maa daisy chained network is recommended as shown above We do not recommend the following Belden 3106A or 9842 Belden 3106A or 9842 Belden 3106A or 9842 Pe MW WM NE Connector EZ Connector a Incorrect Connector Connecting the Communication Cable to the Isolated Link Coupler Attach the terminal block of the link coupler to the Belden 3106A or 9842 cable as shown below Additional terminal blocks are available for replacement see Chapter 11 Setting Up the DH 485 Network A 15 S
286. types of modems In all cases the processors act as Data Terminal Equipment DTE DTE send and or receive data on a network Modem or line drivers act as Data Communication Equipment DCE which provide the signal conversion and coding required for communication between DTE and data circuits Other DCE include phone line modems and specialized modems such as radio and satellite link modems In addition to Common Return COM Receive Data RXD and Transmit Data TXD the following active modem control lines are provided on the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors RTS Request to Send this output signal indicates to the modem or other DCE that the DTE wants to transmit CTS Clear to Send this input signal from the modem indicates the modem is ready to receive the transmission by the DTE for forwarding over a link DSR Data Set Ready this input signal indicates the DCE device is ready for operation Loss of this signal causes a modem lost condition in the processor DTR Data Terminal Ready this output signal from the DTE indicates that it is ready for operation You can also use this signal with the processor to initiate DTR dialing in dial up modems that support such a feature DCD Data Carrier Detect this is an input signal from the DCE that indicates a carrier signal is being received and that presumably data is to be received for forwarding to the DTE connected RS 232 Communication Int
287. ubleshooting the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 PROCESSOIS Vane Mims FORA EK ES EE RE 10 9 Clearing SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Faults Using the Keyswitch 4 5 4 to hed ee he9 10 9 Identifying SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor EOIS ee aa ip che Sts a N E E E PA Soh aes 10 10 Replacement Parts Setting Up the DH 485 Network RS 232 Communication Interface Table of Contents v Identifying SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processor Communication Errors oaaae a 10 13 Identifying Processor Errors while Downloading an Operating Syste a s ea Da E e EDE ee 10 18 Returning the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processors to Initial Factory Conditions 10 20 Troubleshooting Your Input Modules 10 22 Input Circuit Operation 00000 10 22 Troubleshooting Your Input Modules 10 23 Troubleshooting Your Output Modules 10 24 Output Circuit Operation oasa ea ean wees Bue 10 24 Troubleshooting Your Output Modules 10 25 Chapter 11 Replacement Cables and Connectors 11 1 Cable Connectivity SUMMATY 4 ou ead eek eae eek 11 2 Replacement Terminal Blocks 11 3 Other Replacement Hardware 000 11 3 Appendix A DH 485 Network Description ee aed Ea es A 1 DH 485 Network Protocol s lt ises 4eSns se eS aches A 2 DH 485 Token Rotation ogg Be xGny acta tee eg eae A 2 DH 485 Network Initializati
288. ublication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit Any part can fail including the switches in a master control relay circuit The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit which would be a safe power off failure However if one of these switches shorts out it no longer provides any safety protection These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed The printed circuit boards of the controller must be protected from dirt oil moisture and other airborne contaminants To protect these boards the controller must be installed in an enclosure suitable for the environment The interior of the enclosure should be kept clean and the enclosure door should be kept closed whenever possible Regularly inspect your terminal connections for tightness Loose connections may cause improper functioning of the controller or damage the components of the system ATTENTION To ensure personal safety and to guard against damaging equipment inspect connections with incoming power off The National Fire Protection Association NFPA provides recommendations for electrical equipment maintenance Refer to article 70B of the NFPA for general requirements regarding safety related work practices Chapter 4 Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System This chapter provides mounting dimensions for e 4 7 10 and 13 slot chassis e link c
289. uires 1784 PCM6 cable Procedures 1 Check the contents of the shipping box Reference Unpack the shipping boxes making sure that the contents include e SLC 500 Modular Processor installation instructions Publication 1747 IN009 e SLC 500 Modular Chassis Catalog Numbers 1746 A4 1746 A7 1746 A10 or 1746 A13 installation instructions Publication Number 1746 IN016 e SLC 500 Modular Power Supplies Catalog Numbers 1746 P1 1746 P2 1746 P3 1746 P4 1746 P5 1746 P6 or 1746 P7 installation instructions Publication Number 1746 IN004 If the contents are incomplete call your local Rockwell Automation representative for assistance Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Quick Start for Experienced Users 1 3 Follow the steps below Chapter 3 System Installation 1 Determine the amount of spacing required for mounting your system Recommendations c c A i i 1746 C9 Cable SLC 500 1746 C7 Cable SLC 500 i SLC 500 ID i A 1746 C9 Cable Recommended Spacing A 15 3 to 20 0 cm 6 to 8 in when using the 1746 C9 cable If you ae Se S e mount two 13 slo
290. unication media options for the SLC 5 05 are e built in twisted pair 10Base T e with media converters or hubs fiber optic broadband thick wire coaxial cable 10Base 5 thin wire coaxial cable 10Base 2 See the following page for more information on Ethernet physical media Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 E 2 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network The SLC 5 05 supports Ethernet communication via the Ethernet communication channel 1 shown in the drawing below SLC 5 05 CPU RUN FLT BATT RUN REM PROG FORCE ENET RS232 al rae Channel 1 Ethernet 10Base T Channel 0 RS 232 DH485 DF1 or ASCII SLC 5 05 Performance Actual performance of an SLC 5 05 processor varies according to Considerations e size of Ethernet messages e frequency of Ethernet messages e network loading e the implementation of and performance of your processor application program Optimal Performance RSLinx to SLC 5 05 Processor 2 node Ethernet network Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second Single Typed Read 1 50 50 Single Typed Reads 20 58 1160 Single Typed Reads 100 55 5500 Single Typed Reads 256 49 12 544 Optimal Performance SLC 5 05 to SLC 5 05 Processor 2 node Ethernet network Operation Words MSG per Second Words per
291. ured olor ted Flashing during The processor detects a major error either in operation the processor chassis or memory On steady A fatal error is present no communications Off There are no errors BATT On steady The battery voltage has fallen below a Color red threshold level or the battery is missing or not connected Off The battery is functional Identifying the Components of Your Processor 5 11 Processor When It Is Indicates that Lep 2 FORCE Flashing One or more input or output addresses have Color amber been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled On steady The forces have been enabled Off No forces are present or enabled DH On steady The Communications Active Bit S 1 7 is set Color green or red in the System Status file and the processor is actively communicating on the DH network Flashing Green The processor is trying to establish communications but there are no other active nodes on the DH network Flashing Red There are duplicate nodes on the link with the same node address RS 232 On steady The SLC 5 04 processor is transmitting on the Color green DF1 ASCII Mode network Off The SLC 5 04 processor is not transmitting on DF1 ASCII Mode the network On steady The Communications Active Bit S 33 4 is set DH 485 Mode in the System Status file and the processor is actively communicating on the DH 485 networ
292. urrent The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction A mnemonic defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of instructions available within a controller I O Inputs and Outputs IP Address A 32 bit address assigned to hosts that want to participate in a TCP IP internet IP addresses are the abstraction of physical hardware addresses with a network and host partition which makes routing efficient Isolated Link Coupler The link coupler provides an electrically isolated network connection for an SLC 500 controller processor or programming station The link couplers connect the daisy chained DH 485 communication cable ladder logic A graphical programming format resembling a ladder like diagram The ladder logic programing language is the most common programmable controller language least significant bit LSB The element or bit in a binary word that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 8 Glossary Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 LIFO Last In First
293. us LEDs are matched to the appropriate table move across the table identifying error description and probable causes 4 Follow the recommended action steps for each probable cause until the error is corrected 5 If recommended actions do not correct the error contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or distributor Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 10 4 Troubleshooting Identifying SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processor Errors The following LEDs and tables provide you with information regarding error messages possible cause s for the error and recommended action to resolve the error Table 10 1 SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 Processor Errors If the LEDs Indicate e All LEDs Off e Status of SLC 5 02 Comm LED does not matter The Following Error Exists Inadequate system power Probable Cause No line power Recommended Action N Verify proper line voltage and connections on the power terminals Verify proper 120 240V power supply jumper selection See page 6 10 Power supply fuse blown N Check the incoming power fuse check for proper incoming power connections Replace fuse If fuse blows again replace the power supply See page 9 7 on fuse replacement Power supply overload Smi N Remove line power to power supply remove several output modules from the chassis wait five minutes reapply power If condition reoccurs re calculate m
294. use CPU memory error Recommended Action Cycle power Faulty memory module 1 Remove power and then remove the memory module from the processor 2 Re install the processor and re apply power to the power supply If steady CPU Fault LED changes to flashing replace the existing memory module with a replacement module See Chapter 6 for removing and installing memory modules Faulty processor or power supply 1 Place the processor in another chassis not in the existing system and cycle power If steady CPU Fault LED reappears replace the processor 2 If CPU Fault LED clears monitor the line power going to the power supply in existing system Replace existing system power supply if line power checks OK Processor firmware installed incorrectly If upgrading the processor to a different firmware level verify that the firmware chip orientation matches the upgrade kit directions e Power LED On e CPU Fault LED Flashing e All Other LEDs Off e Status of SLC 5 02 Comm LED does not matter CPU Major Fault Initial CPU factory power up condition 1 See Chapter 8 and follow the start up procedures 2 Clear processor memory to get rid of the flashing CPU Fault LED Hardware software Major Fault detected erratic repetitive power cycling can cause a processor major hardware fault Monitor Status File word S 6 for major error code N Refer to the SLC 500 I
295. use a memory module and program it for auto loading on processor fault or power cycle for quick recovery Selecting Surge Suppressors Most output modules have built in surge suppression to reduce the effects of high voltage transients However you should use an additional suppression device if an output module is being used to control an inductive device such as e relays e motor starters e solenoids e motors Additional suppression is especially important if your inductive device is in series with or parallel to a hard contact such as e push buttons e selector switches Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 28 Selecting Your Hardware Components Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device you reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by interrupting the current to that inductive device and prolong the life of the switch contacts You also prevent electrical noise from radiating into system wiring The diagram below shows an output module with a suppression device DC or L1 AC or DC Output Module DC COM or L2 If you connect an SLC 500 controller triac output to control an inductive load use varistors to suppress noise Choose a varistor that is appropriate for the application Rockwell Automation recommends the following surge suppressors for triac outputs when switching 1
296. ut channel 0 B 2 planning considerations for a network A 9 Power Considerations Common Power Source 3 13 Input States on Power Down 3 15 line conditions other types of 3 16 Loss of Power Source 3 15 undervoltage operation 3 16 power source loss of 3 15 power supplies installing 1 5 6 8 setting jumpers 6 9 power supply fuse replacing 9 7 Power Supply Worksheet F 1 power removing 10 2 Preparing Your Wiring Layout 7 4 Preventing Excessive Heat 3 6 Preventive Maintenance 3 18 processor installation 1 8 6 5 processor files Glossary 11 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 processor hardware features SLC 5 01 5 1 SLC 5 02 5 3 SLC 5 03 5 6 SLC 5 04 5 9 SLC 5 05 5 12 5 13 processor specifications ambient temperature rating 2 11 certification 2 11 humidity 2 11 LED indicators 2 11 local I O capacity 2 11 maximum chassis slots 2 11 memory back up options 2 11 noise immunity 2 11 program memory 2 11 program scan holdup time after loss of power 2 11 remote 0 capacity 2 11 shock operating 2 11 standard RAM 2 11 vibration 2 11 PROG keyswitch position for the SLC 5 03 and SLC 5 04 processors 5 15 program alteration 10 3 program file definition Glossary 11 program memory processor specification 2 11 program mode Glossary 12 program scan definition Glossary 12 program scan hold up time after loss of power 2 11 Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines 3 9 programming device Glossary 12 publicat
297. utines from an SLC 500 processor thereby conserving ladder logic memory For more information on the 1746 BAS module see the SLC 500 BASIC and BASIC T Module User Manual Catalog Number 1746 UM004 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 B 4 RS 232 Communication Interface DF1 Protocol and the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 Processors Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 DF1 protocol combines data transparency ANSI American National Standards Institute specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses F1 It is also a peer to peer link layer protocol This means that system devices have equal access to messages being sent over the RS 232 communication interface DF1 protocol provides two modes of communication full and half duplex DF1 Full Duplex Protocol DF1 full duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol lets you use RS 232 point to point communication in applications that require it This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions You can use channel 0 as a programming port or as a peer to peer port using the MSG instruction In full duplex mode the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors can send and receive messages When the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors receive messages they act as an end device or final destination for the data packets The processo
298. ve only receive only receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate Ethernet z receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate DeviceNet receive and receive and receive and receive and initiate initiate initiate initiate ControlNet _ receive and receive and receive and receive and initiate initiatel41 initiatel initiatel 1 A1747 KE or 1770 KF3 is required to bridge from DF1 full duplex or half duplex slave only to DH485 2 A 1785 KA5 is required 3 A 4 A 5 Either a 1785 KA5 is req 747 SCNR module is between DH and DF1 full duplex full duplex or DH and DF1 half d 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 o bridge from DH to DH 485 747 SDN module is required for scanning 1 0 and for explici messaging on DeviceNet required for scanning I O and for explicit messaging on ControlNet uired to bridge from DH DH to DF1 761 NET ENI is required to bridge from DF1 761 NET DNI is required to bridge from DF1 747 KFC15 module or 1770 KFC15 interface If using 1747 AlC for isolation connect to DH 485 cable or equivalent RS 232 null modem cable ull duplex to Ethernet o DeviceNet TIP is required to bridge from DF1 to ControlNet to DH 485 or the SLC 5 04 s channel to channel passthru feature may be used to bridge between DH and DH 485 or ull duplex passthru available starting with 0S401 Another option is to use the 1785
299. vercurrent Condition Catalog Number SLC Operation Recovery Procedure 1746 P1 Series A made in Japan power supply shutdown CPU fault Reload user program 1746 P1 Series A made in Malaysia 24V dc user shutdown CPU continues Correct overcurrent condition current production 1746 P2 Series A and B power supply shutdown CPU fault Reload user program 1746 P2 Series C 24V dc user shutdown CPU continues Correct overcurrent condition 1746 P4 Series A power supply shutdown CPU fault Reload user program 1746 P5 Series A 24V dc user shutdown CPU continues Correct overcurrent condition 1746 P6 Series A 24V dc user shutdown CPU continues Correct overcurrent condition Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Maan fo 1746 P1 made in Malaysia 1746 P2 Series C 1746 P5 Series A and 1746 P6 Series A power supply to avoid unexpected operation due to 24V dc user power shutdown monitor the 24V dc user output with a 24V dc input channel System Installation Recommendations 3 17 Safety Considerations Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others as well as the condition of your equipment is of primary importance Disconnecting Main Power Locate the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it Ideally the disconnect switch is mounted o
300. wer supplies enclosures operator interfaces memory modules isolation transformers This chapter does not provide you with all the information that you need to select a complete SLC 500 control system To do this we recommend that you use the latest version of the system overview SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I O Modules Publication Number 1747 SOO01 Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 2 2 Selecting Your Hardware Components European Union Directive Compliance Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives EMC Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file e EN 50081 2 EMC Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment e EN 50082 2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific information required by EN61131 2 see the appropriate sections in this pub
301. wer supply on each SLC 500 controller and expansion unit to the ground bus Exact connections will differ between applications Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 3 8 System Installation Recommendations Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Ground Bus Mounting a Ground Bus Ground Lug Tapped Hole Grounding Electrode Conductor to A Grounding Electrode Bolt Size M5 or M6 4 826 System mm or 5 48 mm hardware Internal star washer Size M5 or M6 10 or 12 e Use 2 54 cm 1 in copper braid or 5 2 mm 10 AWG copper wire to connect each chassis the enclosure and a central ground bus mounted on the back panel e Use a steel enclosure to guard against electromagnetic interference EMD e Make sure the enclosure door viewing window is a laminated screen or a conductive optical substrate to block EMD e Install a bonding wire for electrical contact between the door and the enclosure do not rely on the hinge Matietie Po not lay one ground lug directly on top of the other this type of connection can become loose due to compression of the metal lugs Place the first lug between a star washer and a nut with a captive star washer After tightening the nut place the second lug between the first nut and a second nut with a captive star washer Connect Ground Bus to Grounding Electrode System The grounding electrode system is at earth ground potential and is the central ground for al
302. xed point Off State Current For input circuits the maximum amount of leakage current allowed from an input device in its Off state off state leakage current When a mechanical switch is opened off state no current flows through the switch Semiconductor switches and transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches have a small current flow when they are in the off state This current is referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating must be less than the minimum operating current rating of the device that is connected Off State Voltage max The maximum input voltage level detected as an Off condition by the input module on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit ON or OFF for one program scan Glossary 11 online When a device is scanning controlling or when a programming device is communicating with the controller On State Voltage Drop The voltage developed across the output driver circuit during the On state at maximum load current Operating Voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage Output Device A device such as a pilot ligh
303. y default the SLC 5 05 broadcasts BOOTP requests at powerup The BOOTP Valid parameter remains clear until a BOOTP reply has been received BOOTP lets you dynamically assign IP Addresses to processors on the Ethernet Link To use BOOTP a BOOTP Server must exist on the local Ethernet subnet The server is a computer that has BOOTP Server software installed and reads a text file containing network information for individual nodes on the network Publication 1747 UM011E EN P February 2004 Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network E 7 The host system s BOOTP configuration file must be updated to service requests from SLC 5 05 processors The following parameters must be configured Parameter Description IP Address A unique IP Address for the SLC 5 05 processor Subnet Mask Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting RFC 950 Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure Gateway Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the SLC 5 05 that provides connections to another IP network TIP You can use any commercially available BOOTP server If you do not have BOOTP Server capabilities on your network and you want to dynamically configure Channel 1 you can download the free Rockwell Automation BOOTP server from the Rockwell Automation website Go to www ab com networks bootp index html When BOOTP is enabled the following events occur at power up e The processor

1747-UM011E-EN-P, SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents